0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2K views

CR300 Manual de Programacion Español

CELLOCATOR CR300B Manual de Programacion

Uploaded by

yellows80

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2K views

CR300 Manual de Programacion Español

CELLOCATOR CR300B Manual de Programacion

Uploaded by

yellows80

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 237

Cellocator Cello

Programming Manual -
CR300

Proprietary and Confidential

Version 5.3.2.0

Revised and Updated: February 8, 2017

POINTER TELOCATION LTD. 14 HAMELACHA ST. ROSH HA'AYIN 4809133, ISRAEL TEL: 972-3-5723111 FAX: 972-3-5723100 WWW.POINTER.COM

Copyright 2017 by Pointer Telocation, Ltd.

Cellocator Cello
Programming Manual

Legal Notices
IMPORTANT
1. All legal terms and safety and operating instructions should be read thoroughly before
the product accompanying this document is installed and operated.
2. This document should be retained for future reference.
3. Attachments, accessories or peripheral devices not supplied or recommended in
writing by Pointer Telocation Ltd. May be hazardous and/or may cause damage to the
product and should not, in any circumstances, be used or combined with the product.
General
The product accompanying this document is not designated for and should not be used in
life support appliances, devices, machines or other systems of any sort where any
malfunction of the product can reasonably be expected to result in injury or death.
Customers of Pointer Telocation Ltd. Using, integrating, and/or selling the product for use
in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Pointer Telocation
Ltd. For any resulting loss or damages.

Warranty Exceptions and Disclaimers

Pointer Telocation Ltd. Shall bear no responsibility and shall have no obligation under the
foregoing limited warranty for any damages resulting from normal wear and tear, the cost
of obtaining substitute products, or any defect that is (i) discovered by purchaser during
the warranty period but purchaser does not notify Pointer Telocation Ltd. Until after the
end of the warranty period, (ii) caused by any accident, force majeure, misuse, abuse,
handling or testing, improper installation or unauthorized repair or modification of the
product, (iii) caused by use of any software not supplied by Pointer Telocation Ltd., or by
use of the product other than in accordance with its documentation, or (iv) the result of
electrostatic discharge, electrical surge, fire, flood or similar causes. Unless otherwise
provided in a written agreement between the purchaser and Pointer Telocation Ltd., the
purchaser shall be solely responsible for the proper configuration, testing and verification
of the product prior to deployment in the field.
POINTER TELOCATION LTD.S SOLE RESPONSIBILITY AND PURCHASERS SOLE REMEDY
UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THE PRODUCT
HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR SOFTWARE MEDIA (OR IF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT IS NOT
POSSIBLE, OBTAIN A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE) AS PROVIDED ABOVE.
POINTER TELOCATION LTD. EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
PERFORMANCE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
POINTER TELOCATION LTD. BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS
OR INTERRUPTION OF USE, DATA, REVENUES OR PROFITS) RESULTING FROM A BREACH
OF THIS WARRANTY OR BASED ON ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF POINTER
TELOCATION LTD. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OR LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH
DAMAGES.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 2 of 237

Intellectual Property
Copyright in and to this document is owned solely by Pointer Telocation Ltd. Nothing in
this document shall be construed as granting you any license to any intellectual property
rights subsisting in or related to the subject matter of this document including, without
limitation, patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights or other intellectual
property rights, all of which remain the sole property of Pointer Telocation Ltd. Subject to
applicable copyright law, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in or
introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means
(electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise), or for any purpose,
without the express written permission of Pointer Telocation Ltd.
Copyright 2017. All rights reserved.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 3 of 237

Table of Contents

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual - CR300 ................................................................... 1

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 12
1.1 About this Document ..................................................................................................12
1.2 Applicability Table ......................................................................................................12
1.3 References ................................................................................................................13
1.4 Document Conventions ...............................................................................................14
2 Accessing the Configuration Memory via Wireless Channel (OTA) .......................... 15
3 Accessing the Configuration Memory via Direct Wire Interface .............................. 16
4 Event Types generated by Cellocator devices ......................................................... 16
4.1 Logged (Plain) Event ...................................................................................................16
4.2 HRLS Event ...............................................................................................................16
4.3 Distress Event ............................................................................................................16
4.4 Security Event ...........................................................................................................17
5 Address and Bitmask Field Allocation Tables .......................................................... 18
5.1 Address Allocation Table ..............................................................................................18
5.2 Bitmask Field Allocations .............................................................................................30
5.2.1 Application Configuration .............................................................................................30
5.2.2 Communication Settings in Home/Roam GSM Network Mode ...........................................33
5.2.3 WAKE UP Message Configuration ..................................................................................33
5.2.4 GPS Management Bitmap ............................................................................................34
5.2.5 Maintenance Server Configuration Bitmap .....................................................................34
5.2.6 GSM Band / GPRS Auth Type Programming ...................................................................34
5.2.7 UART Configuration ....................................................................................................34
5.2.8 Alternative Inputs Usage Bitmap ..................................................................................35
5.2.9 CR300 Outputs Control ...............................................................................................35
5.2.10 CR300B 3G I/O control................................................................................................36
5.2.11 Time Based Mask Bitmap.............................................................................................36
5.2.12 Over (and Idle) Speed Session Control Bitmap ...............................................................36
5.2.13 Go/Halt Session Control Bitmap ...................................................................................37
5.2.14 GPS Alerts Mask Bitmap ..............................................................................................37
5.2.15 Time Report Period Value (Home, Roam, High Speed) .....................................................37
5.2.16 Time/Distance Alert Multipliers for High Speed Mode .......................................................38
5.2.17 Mask of Authentication Alerts .......................................................................................38
5.2.18 Discrete Inputs Masks .................................................................................................38
5.2.19 Mask of Analog Inputs Alerts ........................................................................................39

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 4 of 237

5.2.20 GP Frequency Input Configuration Byte .........................................................................40

5.2.21 Violation of Additional GP Frequency Thresholds .............................................................40
5.2.22 Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset Bitmask .........................................40
5.2.23 Outputs Inversion Mask...............................................................................................41
5.2.24 Geo-Fence Alert Mask .................................................................................................41
5.2.25 Offline Tracking - Auto Upload Configuration ..................................................................41
5.2.26 Security Settings Bitmask 1 .........................................................................................41
5.2.27 Security Settings Bitmask 2 .........................................................................................42
5.2.28 Security Logic Configuration ........................................................................................42
5.2.29 Feedbacks / Alarm Triggered / Alarm Cadence Outputs ...................................................42
5.2.30 Active Correlation Lines ...............................................................................................42
5.2.31 Vector Change Detection Bitmask .................................................................................42
5.2.32 Feedback for Driver Behavior Violations Bitmask ............................................................43
5.2.33 Driver Behavior Continuous Violation - Feedback Bitmask ................................................43
5.2.34 Driver Behavior Continuous Violation - Output Activation Template ...................................43
5.2.35 Driver Behavior Continuous Violation - Feedback Logic ....................................................44
5.2.36 Outputs, Auto-Activated upon Jamming Detection ..........................................................44
5.2.37 Accelerometer Configuration ........................................................................................46
5.2.38 Towed Mode Configuration...........................................................................................47
6 Communication and Configuration ......................................................................... 48
6.1 Communication Events ................................................................................................48
6.2 Communication Settings..............................................................................................48
6.2.1 GPRS Settings ............................................................................................................48
6.2.2 SMS Settings .............................................................................................................59
6.2.3 Comm. Permissions in Home/Roam Network ..................................................................60
6.2.4 COM port settings.......................................................................................................62
6.2.5 1-Wire port settings ....................................................................................................64
6.2.6 Data Forwarding from COM Port ...................................................................................66
6.2.7 Distress Session Configuration .....................................................................................69
6.2.8 Wake Up Messages .....................................................................................................70
6.2.9 Offline Tracking ..........................................................................................................71
6.2.10 Cell ID Based Location (Neighborhood list of the serving GSM cell) ...................................75
6.2.11 Internal Accelerometer Configuration ............................................................................79
6.2.12 Roaming List, GSM Operator Management .....................................................................81
6.2.13 GSM Jamming Detection & Reaction (Not Supported by 3G units) .....................................86
6.2.14 Other Configuration Parameters related to Communication Settings ..................................94
6.2.15 GSM Detection ...........................................................................................................99
6.3 GPS Calibration ........................................................................................................ 100
6.3.1 Base Unit (Measurement Factor of GPS Odometer) ....................................................... 100
6.3.2 GPS Odometer Current Value ..................................................................................... 100
6.3.3 Enable IMEI Transmission via Type 0 Message ............................................................. 101
6.3.4 Enable GPS Navigation Start-Stop updates .................................................................. 101

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 5 of 237

6.3.5 GPS Navigation Start/Stop filter ................................................................................. 101

6.3.6 Enable Tight GPS PMODE Filter................................................................................... 101
6.3.7 GPS DOP Threshold .................................................................................................. 102
6.3.8 Velocity Threshold for HIGH SPEED Mode .................................................................... 102
6.3.9 GPS Maintenance Updates ......................................................................................... 103
6.3.10 GPS Odometer Management ...................................................................................... 104
6.3.11 GPS Reset Settings ................................................................................................... 105
6.4 Inputs & Outputs ...................................................................................................... 106
6.4.1 Discrete Inputs Triggering Time Filters ........................................................................ 106
6.4.2 Analog Measurement Averaging Time ......................................................................... 109
6.4.3 Inputs in OTA Message.............................................................................................. 109
6.4.4 Enable Monitoring Logical Status of Ignition in OTA Packets ........................................... 110
6.4.5 Enable Warning Output Activation during Gradual Immobilization ................................... 110
6.4.6 Outputs Pulse Width Period ........................................................................................ 110
6.4.7 LED Management ..................................................................................................... 110
6.4.8 Analog (& Frequency) Inputs in OTA Message .............................................................. 114
6.4.9 Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset .................................................... 115
6.4.10 Feedback Outputs..................................................................................................... 117
6.4.11 Outputs Inversion Mask............................................................................................. 117
6.4.12 Usage Counter Configuration ..................................................................................... 118
6.4.13 Frequency Metering .................................................................................................. 120
6.4.14 Modem & SIM .......................................................................................................... 122
6.4.15 Modem Reset Settings .............................................................................................. 125
6.4.16 GSM Band & GPRS Auth Type .................................................................................... 126
6.4.17 SIM PIN .................................................................................................................. 128
6.5 Power Management .................................................................................................. 130
6.5.1 Power Management Mode .......................................................................................... 130
6.5.2 Enable Automatic Hibernation on Low Power ................................................................ 131
6.5.3 Hibernation Mode Delay ............................................................................................ 131
6.5.4 Enable Pre-Hibernation Update................................................................................... 131
6.5.5 Enable Data Forwarding from Serial Port by SMS (in Hibernation) ................................... 132
6.5.6 GPS Peeking ............................................................................................................ 132
6.5.7 GSM Peeking ........................................................................................................... 133
6.5.8 Battery Charging ...................................................................................................... 134
6.6 Informative Parameters ............................................................................................ 136
6.6.1 Last Distance Event .................................................................................................. 136
6.6.2 Field for Customer Use .............................................................................................. 136
7 Distance and Speed Events ................................................................................... 137
7.1 Distance Events ....................................................................................................... 137
7.1.1 Enable Distance Updates ........................................................................................... 137
7.1.2 Trip for a Distance Event ........................................................................................... 137
7.1.3 Distance Event Multiplier for HIGH SPEED Mode ........................................................... 137

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 6 of 237

7.2 Over (and Idle) Speed .............................................................................................. 138

7.2.1 Velocity Threshold for Over Speed Start Event ............................................................. 138
7.2.2 Velocity Threshold for Over Speed End Event ............................................................... 138
7.2.3 Filter of Over Speed Duration ..................................................................................... 138
7.2.4 Do not use Time Filter to Close Over Speed Session...................................................... 139
7.2.5 Alternative Over Speed Threshold for Input Dependent Mode ......................................... 139
7.2.6 Events and Distress Control ....................................................................................... 141
7.3 Sudden Course Changed and Sudden Speed Change Sensors ........................................ 142
7.3.1 Speed Thresholds V0, V1 and V2 ................................................................................ 142
7.3.2 Delta Speed and Delta Course for Speed Range X ......................................................... 143
7.3.3 Events, Distress and HRLS Updates Control ................................................................. 144
7.3.4 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence ......................................................................................... 145
7.3.5 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Enable ............................................................................... 145
7.3.6 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Threshold Select ................................................................. 145
7.3.7 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Threshold .......................................................................... 146
7.3.8 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Alerts Enable ...................................................................... 146
7.3.9 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Output Activations .............................................................. 146
7.4 Go (Start Movement) and Halt (Stop Movement) Events ............................................... 146
7.4.1 Go/Halt Speed Detection Threshold ............................................................................ 147
7.4.2 Go/Halt Time Threshold Filter .................................................................................... 147
7.4.3 Go/Halt Session Control ............................................................................................ 147
8 Time and Trip Events ............................................................................................ 149
8.1 Start and Stop Alerts ................................................................................................ 149
8.1.1 Start Alert Generation Time Filter ............................................................................... 149
8.1.2 Stop Alert Generation Time Filter ............................................................................... 149
8.2 Time-based Alert ...................................................................................................... 149
8.2.1 Time Alerts Resolution Definer ................................................................................... 150
8.2.2 Time Alerts Period Value ........................................................................................... 150
8.2.3 Force one second resolution Roaming Mode ................................................................. 150
8.2.4 Time Alert Period Multiplier for High Speed Mode .......................................................... 151
8.2.5 Time Report Period Multiplier for NOIP Mode ................................................................ 151
8.2.6 Table of Time-based Alert Period Calculation ................................................................ 151
8.2.7 V-Trek: Dynamic Time-based Alerts Period Control as a Function of Speed ...................... 152
8.3 Curve Smoothing ..................................................................................................... 153
8.3.1 Enable Vector Change Detection Events /Distress ......................................................... 154
8.3.2 Prevent Curve Smoothing Message Generation during "Halt" Mode ................................. 155
8.3.3 Enable Compressed Vector Change Report................................................................... 155
8.3.4 Compressed Vector Change Report Timeout ................................................................ 156
8.3.5 Vector Change Detection Angle .................................................................................. 156
8.4 Communication Idle Alerts ......................................................................................... 156
8.4.1 Time between Communication Idle Alerts .................................................................... 156

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 7 of 237

8.4.2 Event and Distress Controls for Communication Idle Alert .............................................. 157
8.4.3 Do not Wake Up from Hibernation upon Comm. Idle Distress ......................................... 157
8.5 Driver Authentication ................................................................................................ 158
8.5.1 Enable Driving Without Authentication Alert ................................................................. 160
8.5.2 Enable Authentication Updated Alert ........................................................................... 160
8.5.3 Maximum Time without Authentication ........................................................................ 160
8.5.4 Enable Authentication Reminder Feedback Output Activation ......................................... 161
8.5.5 Ignition Filter Source for Starting Driver Authentication Time Calculations ....................... 161
8.5.6 Time to Authentication Loss ....................................................................................... 162
8.5.7 Activate Immobilizer while no active Dallas .................................................................. 162
8.5.8 Enable Conditional Activation of Immobilizer ................................................................ 162
8.5.9 Enable Pre-defined Driver IDs List.............................................................................. 163
8.5.10 Enable Dallas ID Updated Event even if it is not in the List .......................................... 163
8.5.11 iButton Codes (30 Buttons) ....................................................................................... 164
8.5.12 Enable Feedback upon Authentication ......................................................................... 164
8.5.13 Enable Resending "Driver Authentication" Alert upon each Detection .............................. 164
8.5.14 Enable Dallas Bus Mode (1-Wire) Bus ......................................................................... 165
8.5.15 Enable Infinite Driver Notifications when Driver is not Identified ..................................... 165
8.5.16 Enable Driver ID Card Removed Event ........................................................................ 165
8.6 Extended Driver Authentication .................................................................................. 166
8.6.1 Enable Differentiation between Driver and Passenger .................................................... 166
8.7 Trailer Connection Monitoring .................................................................................... 169
8.7.1 Dallas Family of Trailer Identifier ................................................................................ 169
8.7.2 Enable Trailer Connection Event ................................................................................. 170
8.7.3 Trailer Connection Distress ........................................................................................ 170
8.7.4 Timeout for Trailer Connection Status Change .............................................................. 170
8.7.5 Trailer Connected: Over Speed Start Velocity threshold ................................................. 171
8.7.6 Trailer Connected: Over Speed End Velocity Threshold .................................................. 171
8.8 Driver Behaviour ...................................................................................................... 172
8.8.1 Behavior Violation Indications to Driver ....................................................................... 172
9 Inputs Events ....................................................................................................... 178
9.1 4 Ignition (Not Supported by CelloTrack) .................................................................. 180
9.1.1 Reporting Journey Start ............................................................................................ 180
9.1.2 Reporting Journey Stop ............................................................................................. 180
9.1.3 Inverting Journey Start/Stop ..................................................................................... 181
9.1.4 Reporting Signal Falling on Ignition ............................................................................ 181
9.1.5 Reporting Signal Rising on Ignition ............................................................................. 181
9.1.6 Inverting Ignition Input ............................................................................................. 181
9.2 5 Lock .................................................................................................................. 182
9.2.1 Function Assigned to Lock Input ................................................................................. 182
9.2.2 Inverting Lock Input ................................................................................................. 182

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 8 of 237

9.2.3 Threshold for Lock Input ........................................................................................... 183

9.2.4 Averaging Factor for Lock Input ................................................................................. 183
9.2.5 Reporting Signal Falling on Lock ................................................................................. 183
9.2.6 Reporting Signal Rising on Lock.................................................................................. 184
9.3 11- Unlock............................................................................................................... 184
9.3.1 Function Assigned to Unlock Input .............................................................................. 184
9.3.2 Inverting Unlock Input .............................................................................................. 185
9.3.3 Threshold for Unlock Input ........................................................................................ 185
9.3.4 Averaging Factor for Unlock Input .............................................................................. 185
9.3.5 Reporting Signal Falling on Unlock .............................................................................. 186
9.3.6 Reporting Signal Rising on Unlock............................................................................... 186
9.4 14 Door ................................................................................................................ 186
9.4.1 Door Input Type ....................................................................................................... 186
9.4.2 Function Assigned to Door Input................................................................................. 187
9.4.3 Scaling Factor for Frequency Report on Door Input ....................................................... 188
9.4.4 Thresholds on Door as a General Purpose Frequency Counter ........................................ 189
9.4.5 Time Filter for Frequency/Analog Door Input ................................................................ 190
9.4.6 Door Freq. Input Violation Type .................................................................................. 190
9.4.7 Threshold for Door Input ........................................................................................... 191
9.4.8 Averaging Factor for Door Input ................................................................................. 191
9.4.9 Inverting Door Input ................................................................................................. 192
9.4.10 Reporting Signal Falling On Door ................................................................................ 192
9.4.11 Reporting Signal Rising on Door ................................................................................. 192
9.5 15 Shock .............................................................................................................. 193
9.5.1 Shock Input Type ..................................................................................................... 193
9.5.2 Function Assigned to Shock Input ............................................................................... 193
9.5.3 Scaling Factor for Frequency Report on Shock Input ..................................................... 194
9.5.4 Threshold on Shock as a General Purpose Frequency Counter ........................................ 196
9.5.5 Time Filter for Violation of Frequency / Analog Shock Input ........................................... 196
9.5.6 Shock Freq. Input Violation Type ................................................................................ 196
9.5.7 Threshold for Shock Input ......................................................................................... 197
9.5.8 Averaging Factor for Shock Input ............................................................................... 198
9.5.9 Inverting Shock Input ............................................................................................... 198
9.5.10 Reporting Signal Falling on Shock Input ...................................................................... 199
9.5.11 Reporting Signal Rising on Shock Input ....................................................................... 199
9.6 16 Panic ............................................................................................................... 199
9.6.1 Function Assigned to Panic Input ................................................................................ 199
9.6.2 Inverting Panic Input ................................................................................................ 200
9.6.3 Threshold for Panic Input .......................................................................................... 200
9.6.4 Averaging Factor for Panic Input ................................................................................ 201
9.6.5 Reporting Signal Falling on Panic ................................................................................ 201
9.6.6 Reporting Signal Rising On Panic ................................................................................ 201

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 9 of 237

10 Power Events ....................................................................................................... 202

10.1 Power Threshold Settings .......................................................................................... 202
10.1.1 Main Power Low Threshold High/Low levels ............................................................... 202
10.1.2 Main Power Disconnection Threshold High/Low Levels ................................................ 203
10.1.3 Backup Battery Low Threshold High/Low Levels ......................................................... 203
10.2 Power Events/Distress Control ................................................................................... 204
10.2.1 Enabled Main Power Disconnected in Ignition Off Mode alert .......................................... 204
10.2.2 Enabled Main Power Low in Ignition Off Mode Alert ....................................................... 204
10.2.3 Enabled Backup Battery Disconnected in Ignition Off Mode Alert .................................... 204
10.2.4 Enabled Backup Battery Low in Ignition Off Mode Alert.................................................. 205
10.2.5 Enabled Main Power Disconnected in Ignition On Mode Alert .......................................... 205
10.2.6 Enabled Main Power Low in Ignition On Mode Alert ....................................................... 205
10.2.7 Enabled Backup Battery Disconnected in Ignition On Mode Alert ..................................... 205
10.2.8 Enabled Backup Battery Low in Ignition On Mode Alert .................................................. 206
10.2.9 Period between the Alerts, Triggered by Detection of Power Disconnection ...................... 206
10.3 Radio-Off Mode (Hardcoded - Always Enabled) ............................................................. 206
11 Geo-Fences and Towing........................................................................................ 208
11.1 Geo-Fence ............................................................................................................... 208
11.1.1 Format of Geographical Perimeter .............................................................................. 209
11.1.2 Four Configuration Bytes of the Fence ......................................................................... 209
11.1.3 TOE - Type of Entry .................................................................................................. 210
11.1.4 Waypoint ................................................................................................................. 210
11.1.5 Geo Hot Spot ........................................................................................................... 210
11.1.6 No Modem Zone ....................................................................................................... 211
11.1.7 Output Control ......................................................................................................... 211
11.1.8 Output Activation Pattern .......................................................................................... 212
11.2 Fences Configuration ................................................................................................ 212
11.2.1 Geo-Fence Logic ....................................................................................................... 212
11.2.2 Geo-Fence Violation Filter .......................................................................................... 213
11.2.3 Ignore Geo-Fence Violation on Boot (after Reset) ......................................................... 213
11.2.4 Control of Geo-Fence Alters (Events and Distress) ........................................................ 214
11.2.5 Geo-Fence Heading Angle .......................................................................................... 215
11.2.6 Geo-Fence Priority .................................................................................................... 216
11.3 Towing Detection and Towed Mode (Not supported by CelloTrack) .................................. 218
11.3.1 Towing Detection...................................................................................................... 218
11.3.2 Towed Mode ............................................................................................................ 220
12 Crash Detection Feature ....................................................................................... 222
12.1 General ................................................................................................................... 222
12.2 Crash Detection Configurable Parameters .................................................................... 223
12.2.1 Light Crash Detection Threshold ................................................................................. 223
12.2.2 Heavy Crash Detection Threshold ............................................................................... 223

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 10 of 237

12.2.3 Enable Crash Detection Events for Light/Heavy Crash ................................................... 223
12.2.4 Enable Distress for Light/Heavy Crash ......................................................................... 224
13 OneWire Temperature Sensors ............................................................................. 225
13.1 One Wire Temperature Measurement Update Configuration ........................................... 226
14 Auxiliary Satellite Unit.......................................................................................... 228
14.1 Auxiliary Satellite: Cellular network connect-reconnect criteria ....................................... 228
14.2 Falling Back to Satellite ............................................................................................. 229
14.2.1 Auxiliary Satellite: No GSM-GPRS Timeout (Basic, Advanced) ........................................ 229
14.2.2 Auxiliary Satellite: Timeout Resolution for No GSM-GPRS .............................................. 229
14.3 Restore Cellular........................................................................................................ 229
14.3.1 Auxiliary Satellite: GSM-GPRS Reconnect Timeout (Basic, Advanced) .............................. 229
14.3.2 Auxiliary Satellite: Timeout Resolution of GSM-GPRS Reconnect ..................................... 230
14.4 Satellite Control Bitmask ........................................................................................... 230
14.4.1 Auxiliary Satellite Unit- Enable Periodic Distress Events ................................................. 230
14.4.2 Auxiliary Satellite Unit - Satellite Operational Mode ....................................................... 231
14.4.3 Auxiliary Satellite Unit - Periodic Distress Report Period ................................................ 231
15 TDLT ..................................................................................................................... 232
15.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 232
15.2 TDLT Configuration ................................................................................................... 232
15.2.1 Disable TDLT ........................................................................................................... 232
15.2.2 TDLT Output Number ................................................................................................ 232
15.3 TDLT Dedicated Message ........................................................................................... 233
15.3.1 TDLT Dedicated Message Transmission Rate - Driver Logged In ..................................... 233
15.3.2 TDLT Dedicated Message Transmission Rate - No Driver Logged In ................................. 234
15.4 TDLT Vehicle Type .................................................................................................... 234

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 11 of 237

1 Introduction

1.1 About this Document

This document defines the contents of the Cellocator Units Configuration Memory (CM).
The CM is a non-volatile memory, which is used to store different parameters that affect
the behavior of the unit, as well as communication parameters, which are necessary for
the Cellocator units correct operation.
The CM can be read and written both from the wireless channel as well as from the direct
wire interface. Refer to the Wire and Wireless Protocols in order to learn how to read and
write to the CM. Note that if the stored communication parameters are not correct, the
wireless channel might not work, so the only way to program the CM might be via the
direct wire interface.

1.2 Applicability Table

Device Comments

CR300 FW Version 41q.

The following features are not supported by default in
CR300/CR300B and requires a license. Please contact
Cellocator's sales representatives for more information:

P/N Item MFG Description

FR0001 Cell-ID1

FR0002 Curve Smoothing

FR0003 In Cabin Speed alert

FR0004 Offline Tracking

FR0005 Transparent Mode (Forwarding from

serial is not supported)

FR0006 Advanced Roaming

FR0007 Up to 100 Geo Fences

FR0008 Usage Counter

FR0009 Privacy mode

FR0010 Analogue Input

1
Not supported for 3G variants

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 12 of 237

Device Comments

FR0011 Gradual immobilize2

FR0012 Roam msg rate

FR0013 Driver ID

1.3 References
All the reference documents listed in the following table can be downloaded from the
support section of the Pointer Website (www.pointer.com).

# Reference Description

2
Requires additional CR300 output configurations, as defined in parameter 506

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 13 of 237

1.4 Document Conventions

Unless otherwise specified:

All multiple bytes values are stored and treated Intel-style (meaning, little endian,
least significant bytes first).

All the parameters are loaded from CM upon reset. In other words, changing the
programming parameters will take effect only after unit reset.
This document defines the common programmable features, supported by all the
modifications of Cellocator units, as well as the specific programmable options, supported
by specific modifications only. The non-common options are highlighted.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 14 of 237

2 Accessing the Configuration Memory via Wireless

Channel (OTA)
When done over the air (OTA), CM access is performed in blocks. The 4096 bytes are
partitioned to aligned, non-overlapping blocks of 16 bytes. This means the whole CM
space contains 256 different blocks, assigned with block codes of 0 (zero) to 255
(decimal).
The first block (which represents CM locations 0 to 15 decimal) is assigned with block
code 0 (zero). The following blocks are assigned with successive numbers (block 1 for
locations 16 to 31 and so on).
Refer to the Cellocator Wireless Communication Protocol document for more information
about accessing the CM via the wireless channel.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 15 of 237

3 Accessing the Configuration Memory via Direct

Wire Interface
The CM cells are accessed via the direct wire interface in a linear manner. This means
that cells are identified by their actual addresses there are no blocks or pages.
Refer to the Cellocator Serial Communication Protocol for more information about
accessing the CM via the direct wire interface.

4 Event Types generated by Cellocator devices

Every event (like trigger on input, violation of speed any other), generated by the
Cellocator unit can be threaded in 4 ways, as per the descriptions below. Every enabled
event causes the unit to generate a location message type 0 (see description in Cellocator
Wireless Communication Protocol) with the appropriate transmission reason. The various
event types are described in the following sections.

4.1 Logged (Plain) Event

If the condition for the specific event is met, the unit will create an event and store it into
its non-volatile memory. The event will be uploaded to the Control Center only during the
GPRS session and will be deleted from the memory of the unit only after reception of an
Acknowledge. Note: Plain events will never be delivered by SMS.

4.2 HRLS Event

This is a private case of Plain Event. If the condition for the specific event is met, the unit
will create a pre-defined number of plain events (one a second) and store them into its
non-volatile memory. Upon the end of storing the unit will upload them to the Control
Center, similarly to any other plain events.

4.3 Distress Event

If the condition for the specific event is met, the unit will create a series of messages
(session) with the same transmission reason. The messages will be uploaded to the
Control Center immediately with the first available communication transport (during IP
session over IP, otherwise by SMS). The messages are not stored in the memory and if
there is no cellular coverage at the moment of sending the message will be lost. Distress
events do not require ACK from the control center.
The number and time between messages in a Distress transmission session is defined in a
Time between Transmissions section of that document.
Distress sessions caused by the same trigger, which occurred while the first session is not
over, restarts the session from the beginning.
Distress sessions caused by a different trigger, which occurred while the first session is
not over, causes a new distress session (up to 5 distress sessions can be maintained
concurrently).
A 6th distress session, while the previous 5 are still active, will be lost.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 16 of 237

It is also possible to initiate an endless (or specified duration) distress session by

command from the CCC. Upon starting, this session cancels all active distress sessions.
The session will be stopped by any other distress session or by a command from the OTA.
Distress sessions may be prolonged by up to 20 seconds after the transmission of the last
distress message.

4.4 Security Event

As per the Distress Event, but in this instance the condition for event generation is only
checked when the alarm of the unit is armed (only applicable for security modification of
the Cellocator unit). If the condition for the specific event is met, the unit will create a
series of messages with the same transmission reason.
The number and time between messages in a Security transmission session is defined in a
Security Section of that document.
IMPORTANT: Any event can be created in multiple ways simultaneously.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 17 of 237

5 Address and Bitmask Field Allocation Tables

This section describes the addresses and bit mask field allocations. Where relevant, there
are references to corresponding sections, where you can find further information.

Address allocation table, see below

Bitmask Field allocation tables, page 30

5.1 Address Allocation Table

Address Purpose

0 Application Configuration byte 1

1 Application Configuration byte 2

3-4 Hibernation mode communication settings

5 Unused

6 Application Configuration byte 3

7 Application Configuration byte 4

8 - 31 Operational Sever - PPP Username

32-34 Trip for a Distance event in Roaming mode

35 Time/Distance alert multipliers for High Speed in Roaming GSM

36 - 65 Operational Sever - APN

66 - 69 Default Target IP Address (for GPRS)

70 - 71 Time between Idle Transmissions

72 - 73 Time between Distress Transmissions

74 Operational Server - Modem type code

75 Number of Distress transmissions

76 - 79 GPS odometer's current value

80 - 83 Base unit (measurement factor of GPS odometer)

84 Max Time between GPS readings for SxT calculation

85 - 88 GPS odometer - Last Distance Event (in base units)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 18 of 237

Address Purpose

89 - 91 Trip for a Distance event (in base units)

92 Time/Distance alert multipliers for High Speed in Home GSM

93 Over Speed velocity threshold for GPS Over Speed Start event

94 Over Speed velocity threshold for GPS Over Speed End event

95 Over Speed time event filter

96 Idle Speed Velocity threshold for GPS Idle End event

97 Idle Speed Velocity threshold for GPS Idle Speed Start event

98 Idle Speed event time filter

99 GPS Events Mask Bitmap

100 - 101 Inputs Logic Invert Mask

102 GPS Distress Triggers Bitmapped mask

103 HRLS Trigger Mask of GPS Events

104 Journey Start Event time filter

105 Journey Stop Event time filter

106 Time Report Period Value

107 - 108 Listening UDP Port (while connected to both operational server or
maintenance server)

109 - 110 Operational server TCP/UDP Target Port

111 Maximum time without authentication

112 Time to Authentication loss

113 Main Power Disconnection threshold - high level

114 Main Power Disconnection threshold - low level

115 Main Power Low threshold - high level

116 Main Power Low threshold - low level

119 Backup Battery Low threshold - high level

120 Backup Battery Low threshold - low level

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 19 of 237

Address Purpose

121 Mask of Analog Inputs Events

122 Mask of Analog Inputs Distress

123 Mask of Authentication events

124 - 125 Inputs Events mask on Falling

126 - 127 Inputs Events mask on Raising

128 - 129 Inputs Distress mode mask - on Falling

130 - 131 Inputs Distress mode mask - on Raising

132 - 133 Towing detection Speed threshold

134 - 135 Towing detection Geo-Fence perimeter

136 Common Discrete Inputs change Time filter

137 Towing detection filter

138 Maximum Backup Battery extra charge time

139 Message Transit Acknowledge timeout

140 Outputs pulse width period

141 - 164 Operational Sever - PPP Password

165 - 166 Modem Reset Period

167 - 176 BCALL (Brake down) Destination number

177 - 186 SMS Center Address

187 - 196 SMS Default Destination Address

197 - 200 SIM PIN code

201 - 202 Communication settings in Home GSM Network Mode

203 - 204 Communication settings in Roam GSM Network Mode

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 20 of 237

Address Purpose

205 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Ignition Off - 1st activated output
(Infrastructure)

206 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Ignition Off - Template of 1st

activated output (1st byte) (Infrastructure)

207 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Ignition Off - Template of 1st

activated output (2nd byte) (Infrastructure)

208 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Ignition Off 2nd activated output

209 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Ignition Off - Template of 2nd

activated output (1st byte) (Infrastructure)

210 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Ignition Off - Template of 2nd

activated output (2nd byte)

211 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Ignition Off - Delay for output
activation for the 1st output (Infrastructure)

212 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Ignition Off - Delay for output
activation for the 2nd output (Infrastructure)

213 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Jamming Detection Time Filter:

Jamming detection time in resolution of 3 Seconds. Ranges between 3
Seconds to 765 Seconds. Default 10 Seconds (Infrastructure)

214 Advanced GSM Jamming detection Ignition On and Ignition Off

Jamming End Time Filter (15 Sec resolution)
(Infrastructure)

215 Logged Events Amount for Upload Offline Events

216-217 Unused

218-219 Logged Events Upload Periodic Timer

220 Timeout before switching off the modem

221 Number of Logged Events Upload Retries

222 Time Between Logged Events Upload Retries

223-229 Unused

2303 Modem On Delay Timer

3
Available only for CR300B (New Platform) from FW version 43m and later, and for CR300B
(Legacy) from FW version 43h and later.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 21 of 237

Address Purpose

231-239 Unused

250-254 Unused

255 Offline Tracking - Auto Upload configuration

256-258 Unused

259-260 Offline Tracking - Time to Auto Upload after Trip Stop

261 Trailer Connected mode: Over-speed Start Velocity threshold

262 Trailer Connected mode: Over-speed End Velocity threshold

263 GPS Peeking Max. On Time

264 - 265 GPS Peeking Off Time

266 Power Management mode

267 GSM Peeking Maximum Modem On Time

268 - 269 GSM Peeking Off Time

270 GSM Peeking Maximum Network Registration Time

271 - 272 Hibernation Mode Delay

283 Number of retries to forward data over UDP

284 Anti-Flooding timer

285 Garmin Configuration

CelloTrack Configuration 1

429 - 434 Dallas 01 code

435 - 440 Dallas 02 code

441 - 446 Dallas 03 code

449 Feedback bitmap

455 Velocity threshold for HIGH SPEED mode

460 TDLT Configuration

461 TDLT Dedicated Message

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 22 of 237

Address Purpose

462 TDLT Vehicle Type

465 Additional inputs functionality control bitmask

466 Analog Measurement Averaging Time

467 Accelerometer Configuration

468 Voltage Level Threshold IgnitionOn Detection

469 Internal variable: AHR counter

470 Towed Mode

471-472 UART configuration

473 Speed Range Threshold V0

474 Speed Range Threshold V1

475 Speed Range Threshold V2

476 Harsh Braking Threshold for Speed range 0

477 Harsh Braking Threshold for Speed range 1

478 Harsh Braking Threshold for Speed range 2

479 Harsh Braking Threshold for Speed range 3

480 Course Delta Threshold for Speed range 0

481 Course Delta Threshold for Speed range 1

482 Course Delta Threshold for Speed range 2

483 Course Delta Threshold for Speed range 3

484 Mask of Authentication Distress

485 Time Based Alert Period Multiplier for NOIP mode

486 - 487 HRLS Trigger Mask Inputs Failing Events

488 - 489 HRLS Trigger Mask Inputs Raising Events

490 HRLS Trigger Mask Analog Inputs Events

491 Number of Events during HRLS

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 23 of 237

Address Purpose

492 Idle Speed Alerts Control Bitmask

493 Time Based Events Mask Bitmap

494 Time Based Distress Mask Bitmap

495 HRLS Trigger Mask Time Based Events (not supported, Infrastructure
only)

496 GPS Events Mask (second byte, the first is on 99)

497 Active GPS Distress Triggers Bitmapped mask (second byte, the first is
on 102)

498 HRLS Trigger Mask of GPS Events (second byte, the first is on 103)

499 Time event period in Roaming

500 GPS Navigation Start/Stop Filter

501 Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset Bitmask

502 - 503 Outputs Inversion Mask

504 Maximum number of AHR retries

506 Speaker of Hands Free - Mute Settings and CR300 Outputs Control

509 Vehicles Driver speed delta relative to GPS speed

511 Acceleration Threshold for Speed range 0

512 Acceleration Threshold for Speed range 1

513 Acceleration Threshold for Speed range 2

514 Acceleration Threshold for Speed range 3

515 Registration Lack Timeout (for Modems AHR)

522 GSM Jamming Detection Activated outputs release configuration

525 Application Configuration byte 9

526 Application Configuration byte 10

650 Auxiliary Satellite Unit- Enable Periodic Advanced Auxiliary

Distress Events Satellite Unit

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 24 of 237

Address Purpose

Auxiliary Satellite Unit- Satellite Operational

Mode

656 Auxiliary Satellite Unit- Periodic Distress

Report Period

1000 CR300 3G I/O Control

1004 Geo-Fence Alert Mask for events

1005 Geo-Fence Alert Mask for distress

1006 GeoFence filter threshold

1008 Roaming Operators Management - Timer of Auto-Search

1009 Roaming Operators Management - Number of PLMNs programmed

1010-1012 Roaming Operators Management - PLMN 1

1013-1015 Roaming Operators Management - PLMN 2

. .

1307-1309 Roaming Operators Management - PLMN 100

1314 - 1317 Reserved for Customers Use

designed to store customers proprietary data (like specific EEPROM
content identifier)

1322-1325 Geofence Outputs activation 0-3

1326-1329 New SIM PIN

1330 First Usage Counter input

1331 Second Usage Counter input

1332 Usage Counter Reporting interval

1344 Wake Up message configuration

1346 Period between the alerts, triggered by detection of power

disconnection

1347 Application Configuration byte 5

1348 Application Configuration byte 6

1349 Application Configuration byte 7

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 25 of 237

Address Purpose

1350 Application Configuration byte 8

1351 Violation of additional GP Frequency thresholds

1352 Periodical Modem Reset Randomization threshold

1353 Anti-flooding randomization threshold

1354 GSM band and authentication type

1355 Periodic transparent mode peek time

1356 Periodic transparent mode cycle time

1357 Door Event Begin Additional Time Filter

1358 Door Event End Additional Time Filter

1359 Shock Event Begin Additional Time Filter

1360 Shock Event End Additional Time Filter

1361 Distress Event Begin Additional Time Filter

1362 Distress Event End Additional Time Filter

1363 Unlock Event Begin Additional Time Filter

1364 Unlock Event End Additional Time Filter

1365 Lock Event Begin Additional Time Filter

1366 Lock Event End Additional Time Filter

1367 Ignition (as GP) Event Begin Additional Time Filter

1368 Ignition (as GP) Event End Additional Time Filter

1387-1388 Go / Halt Speed Detection threshold

1389 Go / Halt Time threshold filter

1390 Go / Halt Session Control Bitmask

1391 Modem type code for Maintenance Server

1392-1395 Maintenance Server IP address

1396-1397 Maintenance Server Target Port

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 26 of 237

Address Purpose

1398 Maintenance Server configuration bitmask

1399 Maintenance Server connection period

1400 Maintenance Server Session Time Update

1403-1432 Maintenance Server APN

1433 Vector Change Detection Bitmask

1434 Compressed Vector Change Report Timeout

1435 Vector Change Detection angle

1440-1445 Unused

1448-1609 Dallas codes 04 to 30

1620 Select Measurement source reported in Byte 26 of OTA Msg type 0

1621 Select Measurement source reported in Byte 27 of OTA Msg type 0

1622 Select Measurement source reported in Byte 28 of OTA Msg type 0

1623 Select Measurement source reported in Byte 29 of OTA Msg type 0

1625 GPS DOP Threshold

1626-1649 Maintenance Server APN Username

1650-1673 Maintenance Server APN Password

1674 Input Type / Assigned function Door ( pin 14)

1675-1676 Scaling Factor for Frequency report on Door input

1677 Freq./ Analog Input Configuration Byte

Frequency / Analog Low Threshold / Discrete

1678-1679 Wet/Dry Threshold (1678)

1680-1681 Frequency / Analog High Threshold

1682 Violation Time Filter (Frequency / Analog)

1686 Averaging factor for Door Input

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 27 of 237

Address Purpose

1687 Input Type / Assigned function Shock (pin 15)

1688-1689 Scaling Factor for Frequency report on Shock input

1690 Freq./ Analog Input Configuration Byte

Frequency / Analog Low Threshold / Discrete

1691-1692
Wet/Dry Threshold (1691)

1693-1694 Frequency / Analog High Threshold

1695 Violation Time Filter (Frequency / Analog)

1699 Averaging factor for Shock Input

1700 Assigned function Panic (Distress)

(pin 16)
1701 Threshold for Panic Input

1702 Averaging factor for Panic Input

1703 Assigned function

Unlock (pin 11)
1704 Threshold for Lock Input

1705 Averaging factor for Lock Input

1706 Assigned function

Lock (pin 5)
1707 Threshold for Unlock Input

1708 Averaging factor for Unlock Input

1711 Reserved for manufacturer usage (Timer of retry of SIM operation

upon failure)

1914 Lock to Certain IMSI

1917-1920 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Thresholds: Each Geo-Fence can select 1 of 4

Speed Limit thresholds by setting bits 30-31 in the fence configuration

1900-1920 PointerCept BS

1921-2020 Geo Fence heading angle (Infrastructure)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 28 of 237

Address Purpose

2021-2022 Spare

2023-2038 CR300E (Reserved)

2368-2369 Maximum Possible Scaled Frequency

2370 Violation Timer for 1st additional GP Frequency threshold

2371 Violation Timer for 2nd additional GP Frequency threshold

2372-2373 1st additional GP Frequency threshold

2374-2375 2nd additional GP Frequency threshold

2376 Feedback for driver behavior violations bitmask

2377-2379 Configuration of 1st output for continuous driver behavior violation

2380-2382 Configuration of 2nd output for continuous driver behavior violation

2383 Driver behavior- continuous violation feedback Logic

2384 Light crash detection threshold

2385 Heavy crash detection threshold

2386 Coasting detection - Coasting Violation period

2387 Coasting detection - Speed threshold

2388-2389 Coasting detection - Engine Speed threshold

2390 Enable crash detection feature, Enable EDR event for Light/Heavy
crash, Enable EDR distress for Light/Heavy crash

2392 Timeout for Trailer Connection status change

2393 Dallas Family of Trailer Identifier

2394 -2425 Default target DNS Address (for Maintenance Server)

2426 GSM Jamming Detection - 1st activated output

2427 GSM Jamming Detection - Template of 1st activated output (1st byte)

2428 GSM Jamming Detection - Template of 1st activated output (2nd byte)

2429 GSM Jamming Detection 2nd activated output

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 29 of 237

Address Purpose

2430 GSM Jamming Detection - Template of 2nd activated output (1st byte)

2431 GSM Jamming Detection - Template of 2nd activated output (2nd byte)

2432 GSM Jamming Detection - Delay for output activation for the 1st output

2433 GSM Jamming Detection - Delay for output activation for the 2nd output

2459 OneWire Temperature msg 9 update rate. Home Network

2460 OneWire Temperature msg 9 update rate. Roam Network

2464-2495 Operational Server DNS Address

2496-2516 Geo-Fence 1 Configuration

. .

4080-4095 Geo-Fence 100 Configuration

65006541 Dallas codes 86 to 92

6575-6622 Dallas codes 93 to 100

5.2 Bitmask Field Allocations

This field describes the allocation of configuration bits in the bitmap configuration bytes.
The description of each bit is provided in other sections in this document.

5.2.1 Application Configuration

Address: 0, Application Configuration byte 1

Presentation Enable Enable

Ignition filter
of inputs in conditional infinite
Enable warning source for
wireless activation driver
Enable Long output starting
Cellocator of notification
Transparent Transmission activation Driver
protocol immobilizer when
Mode Ack. Timeout during Gradual Authentication
Driver is
immobilization time
not
calculations
identified

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 30 of 237

Address: 1, Application Configuration byte 2

Wake up Enable Enable Enable Generate an Ignore Geo- Shorten Enable

from Command Immobilizer modems event per Violations on cellular automatic
hibernation Authentication activation power AHR Boot registration hibernation
upon while there is control by timeout on low
periodical no Door power
Usage Authenticatio input
counter n code
update timer
expiration

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 3, Hibernation mode communication settings

Reserved Enable Reserved Renew GPRS

Outgoing upon drop in
Voice Call in (in semi-
hibernation hibernation)

Bits 7 Bits 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 4, Hibernation mode communication settings

Enable Pre- Enable Pre- Enable Data Enable Reserved Enable Enable Auto
Hibernation Hibernation Forwarding Incoming Intermediat Answering
distress event From Serial Voice Call in e state of Incoming
Port By SMS semi- Anti- call in semi-
in semi- hibernation flooding in hibernation
hibernation semi-
hibernation

Bits 7 Bits 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 6, Application Configuration byte 3

Automatic CFE Enable Overlapping Enable GPS Reset GPS Reset Disable Active Enable CFE as
Power mode CFE Geo-Fence Privacy on ignition on ignition Transmissions I/O Extender
control logic: Mode off off
(Infrastructure Global/ When not in When in
) Discrete navigation Navigation

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 7, Application Configuration byte 4

LED Enable
Management Usage
disable Counters

1-Disable
0-Enable

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 31 of 237

Address: 1347, Application Configuration byte 5

Enable IMEI
transmission
via type 0
bytes 33-38
and bits 5,6
of type 0
byte 41

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 1348, Application Configuration byte 6

Enable software flow Enable Consider Disable GSM Enable Enable OTA
control (XON/XOFF) Offline Unknown Jamming Event Auto Ack to
tracking Operators (Legacy + SIM PIN Forward from
As Ignition On) locking OTA to Serial
Forbidden Data Packet

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 1349, Application Configuration byte 7

Enable Trailer Enable Enable Enabling Backward Spare (was: Enable

Connection Trailer differentiation reading a compatible Enable Monitoring
Distress Connection between the 256-bit OTA msg Radio- Off. logical
Event driver and the EEPROM of type 8 The link status of
passenger DS1971 below is for Ignition in
explanation OTA
on that packets
feature)

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 1350, Application Configuration byte 8

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 525, Application Configuration byte 9

Disable GSM Advanced Firmware functional Universal Radio Modem USIM Infrastructure
Jamming GSM modes: Communication Homologation application Robbery Mode
Event Jamming Tester initialization 0- USIM while driving
(Ignition Off) Detection 0-Disable mode application
0- Legacy Fleet mode 0-Disable
(Ignition 1-Enable Disabled
On/Off 1 Legacy Fleet and 1-Enable
0-Do not behavior) Advanced Recovery Disabled
Disable Mode (External Production Enable 1- USIM
1-Disable KeyPad) tester only application
Enabled,
SIM
Application
Toolkit
disabled

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 32 of 237

Address: 526, Application Configuration byte 10

Spare Route GPS Enable

indication to Driver ID
Blinkers Card
Output Removed
0-Disable Event
0-Disable
1-Enable
1-Enable

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.2 Communication Settings in Home/Roam GSM Network Mode

Address: Home GSM: 201; Roam GSM: 203; Hibernation: 3

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 04

Enable SMS Enable Enforce SMS Generate Generate GPRS Enable Generate Generate
outgoing Destination Cell ID Cell ID Cell ID Cell ID
Voice Call packet (RT) packet packet (RT) packet
with any (logged) with any (logged)
distress with any distress with any
while there event while unconditiona event
is no valid there is no lly unconditiona
GPS valid GPS lly

Address: Home GSM: 202; Roam GSM: 204; Hibernation: 4

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Unused Disable Disable Enable Enable IP Enable Auto Answer

forward from active incoming up event Intermediate Voice call (if
serial port to transmissions Voice Call state of Anti- incoming
SMS via SMS flooding voice
enabled)

5.2.3 WAKE UP Message Configuration

Address: 1344

Enable GPRS Enable SMS Number of repetitions,

Wake up Wake up Value of zero set number of retries to 64
message message

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

4
Available only for CR300B (New Platform) from FW version 43m and later, and for CR300B
(Legacy) from FW version 43l and later.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 33 of 237

5.2.4 GPS Management Bitmap

Address: 509

Enable Tight GPS Not used CR200/CR300 Reset last known Enable Pythagoras Enable Speed x Time
PMODE Filter GPS location on Ignition Calculation Calculation (SxT)
management off
Enable
0-Normal
1-Managed

Bit 7 Bits Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

6,5,4

5.2.5 Maintenance Server Configuration Bitmap

Address: 1398

Reserved Enable auto Reconnect to the Enable connection Enable firmware Enable
connection to maintenance to the upgrade from the programming
maintenance server after maintenance maintenance updates from the
server firmware upgrade server on each server maintenance
power up. server

Bit 5-7 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.6 GSM Band / GPRS Auth Type Programming

Address: 1354

GSM Band PPP GPRS GSM band (only for Manual GSM Band Selection PPP GPRS Connection
Selection Mode Connection mode) Authentication type
Authentication
(only for Manual
Selection Mode Authentication type
Selection mode)

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.7 UART Configuration

Address: 471

Reserved Baud rate

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 472

Reserved Flow Control Stop Bits Parity

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 34 of 237

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.8 Alternative Inputs Usage Bitmap

Address: 465

Not Private-Business Mode "Private"/"Business" Enable modems Enable Initialization

used Switch upon Trip End mode toggling power control by & Answering Voice
shock input Call by Shock input

Bits 5-7 Bits 3-4 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.9 CR300 Outputs Control

Address: 506

Spare CR300 LIGHTS output options: CR300 LED output options: Spare

Value Description Value Description

0 Legacy LIGHTS 0 Legacy LED

output behavior output behavior

1 LIGHTS output 1 LED Output Acts

Acts as STD as STD
Immobilizer Immobilizer

2 LIGHTS output 2 LED output Acts

Acts as PWM as PWM
(GRADUAL) (GRADUAL)
Immobilizer Immobilizer

3 N.A: Same as 3 N.A: Same as

option 0 option 0

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Default value:
Bits 3, 4 set to 0: CR300 LED output act as legacy LED signal
Bits 5, 6 set to 0: CR300 LIGHTS output acts as legacy LIGHT signal.

NOTES:
1. When the CR300 STD immobilizer output is switched to "Blinkers" or "LED" Output,
the output will be automatically activated immediately after SW/HW reset or Power
Recycle.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 35 of 237

2. When the CR300 output acts as LED or SIREN it will preserve its state after
SW/HW reset but not after power recycle.

5.2.10 CR300B 3G I/O control

Address: 1000
These configuration bits controls the direction of the CR300B 3G I/Os. Each bit can be
configured to function as Input or output. Please note that when LED and LIGHT are
configured as output, their output source can be selected by parameter: CR300 Outputs
control in address 506.

CR300B 3G LIGHT Pin CR300B 3G LED Pin CR300B 3G Shock Pin CR300B 3G Door Pin:

Description Description Description Description

0 GPIO disabled 0 GPIO disabled 0 GPIO disabled 0 GPIO disabled
1 Input (unlock) 1 Input (Lock) 1 Input (Shock) 1 Input (Door)
2 Output (See CR300 2 Output (See CR300 2 Output (HW preparation 2 Output (HW preparation
Outputs control) Outputs control) only) only)
3 Input and Output 3 Input and Output 3 Input and Output 3 Input and Output

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Default values:
Bit 0: Door Input - 1
Bit 1: Shock Input - 1
Bit 2: LED Output - 2
Bit 3: LIGHT Output - 2

5.2.11 Time Based Mask Bitmap

Address: 493 for events
494 for distress

Only in 494 Unused Enable Time Enable event for

events Communication Idle

Do not wake up from

hibernation upon comm.idle
distress

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.12 Over (and Idle) Speed Session Control Bitmap

Address: 492

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 36 of 237

Create Idle/Over Start Idle speed Dont use time Dont use time Multiplier for filter of Idle Speed Start
Speed End event timer with ignition filter to close Idle filter to close Session
for open session On speed session Over speed
per ignition Off session

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.13 Go/Halt Session Control Bitmap

Address: 1390

Spare Spare Dont use time Multiplier for Go/Halt Time Threshold filter
threshold filter for For "Halt" detection
"Go" detection

Bit 7 Bits 5,6 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.14 GPS Alerts Mask Bitmap

Address: 99 For events
102 For distress
103 For HRLS

Enable event Enable event Enable Enable Enable Idle Enable Over Enable Enable GPS
upon upon speed Sudden Sudden Speed Speed Distance Navigation
location detection Course Speed Events Events Events Start/Stop
change when Change Change Events
detection Ignition Off Sensor sensor
when
Ignition Off

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 496 For events

497 For Distress

Not used Enable Go/Halt Enable Event per Enable GPS

Events GPS Auto Factory Disconnection
0 Disable reset

1 - Enable

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.15 Time Report Period Value (Home, Roam, High Speed)

Address: For Home GSM: 106
For Roam GSM: 499

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 37 of 237

Resolution Basic Period Value (BPV)

Definer

Bits 7 Bits 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.16 Time/Distance Alert Multipliers for High Speed Mode

Address: For Home GSM: 92
For Roam GSM: 35

Time Event Multiplier for HIGH SPEED mode Distance Event Multiplier for HIGH SPEED mode

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.17 Mask of Authentication Alerts

Address: 123 for events

Enables Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Pre- Authenticati Driving

Dallas Bus resending Authenticati Authenticati Dallas ID defined on updated without
"Driver on on reminder updated driver IDs event Authenticati
Authenticati confirmation output event even if list on
0 Bus mode on" upon output activation it is not in
1 Point to each activation the list
point (Bus detection
mode
disabled)

Not used

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 484 for distress

Not used Authentication Driving

updated event without
Authentication

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.18 Discrete Inputs Masks

Address: For Inversion 100-101
Inputs Events on Falling 124-125
Inputs Events on Raising 126-127
Inputs Distress on Falling 128-129

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 38 of 237

Inputs Distress on Raising 130-131

HRLS Trigger Mask of Inputs Falling 486-487
HRLS Trigger Mask of Inputs Raising 488-489
Security inputs mask bitmap 422-425

Lower byte

Driving
Status
Unlock Panic (Ignition or CFE In 1 Shock Door
accelerometer
based)

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Upper Byte

Ignition Accelerometer
Input as status CFE In 6 CFE In 5 CFE In 4 Lock CFE In3 CFE In2
GP
input

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.19 Mask of Analog Inputs Alerts

Address: 121 for events, 122 for distress, 490 for HRLS

Ignition Switch On Ignition Switch Off

Backup Backup battery Main Main Power Backup Backup battery Main Main Power
battery disconnected Power Disconnected battery disconnected Power Disconnected
Low level Low Low level Low
Level Level

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 39 of 237

5.2.20 GP Frequency Input Configuration Byte

Address: 1677 for Door input
1690 for Shock input

Ignore Don't use time Enable voltage Enable voltage Enable voltage Enable voltage Input violation type
violation on filter for / frequency / frequency / frequency / frequency
Ignition On voltage / violation end violation end violation start violation start
frequency distress event distress event
violation end
0 0 Low
Thresh.
1 - High
0-Ignore
0-Use 0-Disable 0-Disable 0-Disable 0-Disable
1 Start 1 0 Keep
violation on 1 Don't use 1 - Enable 1 - Enable 1-Enable 1-Enable Range In
Ignition On 1 - Keep
Out

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.21 Violation of Additional GP Frequency Thresholds

Address: 1351

2nd additional GP frequency threshold 1st additional GP frequency threshold

Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable

distress Event for distress Event for distress Event for distress Event for
for failing failing for raising raising for failing failing for raising raising
violation violation violation violation violation violation violation violation

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.22 Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset Bitmask

Address: 501

Reserved Reserved Blinkers LED St. Reserved Siren Gradual

Immobilizer Stop

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 40 of 237

5.2.23 Outputs Inversion Mask

Address: 502

CFE Out 5 CFE Out 4 CFE Out 3 CFE Out 2 Gradual Stop Unused CFE Out1

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 503

Stand.
Unused CFE Out 6 Unused Blinkers Unused Unused LED
Immobilizer

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.24 Geo-Fence Alert Mask

Address: 1004 - For events
1005 - For distress

Unused Speed No Modem Geo Hot Way Point Keep Out Keep In
Limiting Zone Entry Spot violation Fence Fence
Geo-Fence Traversal violation violation
Event

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.25 Offline Tracking - Auto Upload Configuration

Address: 255

Unused Memory Ignition Off

Full Event

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.26 Security Settings Bitmask 1

Address: 421

Unused Trigger an Alarm Upon

Towing Detection During
Alarm Armed

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 41 of 237

5.2.27 Security Settings Bitmask 2

Address: 424

`Unused Trigger an Alarm Upon

Main Power Disconnection
Detection

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.28 Security Logic Configuration

Address: 428

Unused Auto-gradual Unused Auto Arming Disable Auto Does Not Unused
stop Enable Independent Arming Trigger
from door Silent
delay upon
Unlock
detection

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.29 Feedbacks / Alarm Triggered / Alarm Cadence Outputs

Address: 449 For Feedbacks
450 For Alarm Triggered outputs (CelloR) / Alarm Cadence outputs (CelloAR)

Siren
Note: this
Unused Blinkers Unused output is
unavailable for
CAN variants

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.30 Active Correlation Lines

Address: 287

Unused Shock (pin 15) Unlock (pin 11) Lock (pin 5)

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.31 Vector Change Detection Bitmask

Address: 1433

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 42 of 237

Reserved Prevent Enable Enable Enable

Curve Compress Vector Vector
Smoothing Vector change change
Message change Detection Detection
generation Detection Distress Events
during "Halt"
mode

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.32 Feedback for Driver Behavior Violations Bitmask

Address: 2376

Reserved Excessive Idle Sudden Harsh Harsh Coasting Over Speed

RPM Speed course Acceleration Breaking (irrespective
change of the
source of
threshold)

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.33 Driver Behavior Continuous Violation - Feedback Bitmask

Address: 2377 for first output
2380 for second output

reserved Output Activation Pattern (Upon Driver Output, auto-activated upon Driver
behavior violation) behavior violation detection

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.34 Driver Behavior Continuous Violation - Output Activation Template

Address: 2378 for first output
2381 for second output

Number of activations in a session Activation length

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address: 2379 for first output

2382 for second output

Time between the activation sessions Number of activation sessions

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 43 of 237

5.2.35 Driver Behavior Continuous Violation - Feedback Logic

Address: 2383

Sustain Sustain Sustain

Excessive Coasting Speeding
Feedback Violation Deactivation time threshold
RPM violation violation
In seconds
violation feedback till feedback till
feedback till violation violation
violation ends ends
ends

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Bits 0, 1, 2:

Name in Programmer:
Sustain Speeding violation feedback till violation ends
Sustain Coasting violation feedback till violation ends
Sustain Excessive RPM violation feedback till violation ends

Description: These bits enable the user to sustain continuous violation feedbacks
(according to template) till violation ends. If it is cleared then the feedback template
will be generated once. They are considered only if Output Activation Pattern (upon
continuous driver behavior violation) is set to option number 5 (Warning of delayed
violation registration).

Type: Flag

Default value: 10

Range:
Bits 3 to 7:

Name in Programmer: Feedback Violation Deactivation time threshold

Description: if Output Activation Pattern (upon continuous driver behavior violation)

is set to option number 5 (Warning of delayed violation registration) Continuous
violations will be deactivated when the violation time will be longer than the time
defined in this field. Please refer to Feedback Violation Deactivation time threshold

Type: Decimal

Default value: 10

Range: 0 255

Units: 1 Second

5.2.36 Outputs, Auto-Activated upon Jamming Detection

GSM jamming detection can activate outputs for Driver feedback. The configurable
options enable the selection of one of the units outputs, and define the patterns sent

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 44 of 237

over the selected output. It is possible to activate up to two outputs for a jamming event.
When the advanced jamming mode is enabled (see Advanced GSM Jamming Detection
Mode), the unit differentiates between GSM jamming detection during Ignition-ON and
Ignition-Off. Each jamming condition can activate up to two outputs. The advanced mode
reuses the same outputs activation configuration used in the non Advanced mode for
jamming Outputs activation during Ignition-On.

5.2.36.1 Outputs, Auto-Activated upon Jamming Detection (while in Ignition-

On state)

Output Activation Pattern upon jamming detection

Addresses: 2426 (and 2429 for second output)

Activation Pattern Output number

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Template of Output Activation upon Jamming Detection byte 1

Address: 2427 (and 2430 for second output)

Number of Activation pattern cycles in a session Output Activation length

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Template of Output Activation upon Jamming Detection byte 2

Address: 2428 (and 2431 for second output)

Time between the activation sessions Number of sessions

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Delay for output activation upon jamming detection

Address: 2432 (and 2433 for second output)

Delay for output activation

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.36.2 Outputs, Auto-Activated upon Jamming Detection while in Ignition-Off

Output Activation Pattern upon jamming detection Ignition-Off

Addresses: 205 (and 208 for second output)

Activation Pattern Output number

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 45 of 237

Template of Output Activation upon Jamming Detection byte 1 Ignition-Off

Address: 206 (and 209 for second output)

Number of Activation pattern cycles in a session Output Activation length

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Template of Output Activation upon Jamming Detection byte 2 Ignition-Off

Address: 207 (and 210 for second output)

Time between the activation sessions Number of sessions

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Delay for output activation upon jamming detection Ignition-Off

Address: 211 (and 212 for second output)

Delay for output activation

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.36.3 Release Options of Jamming Detection

Address: 522

Advanced Advanced
Jamming Jamming
detection: detection:
Enable release by Enable release by Enable release Enable release
Authorized Dallas Ignition Activity by Jamming by Jamming
End in End in
Ignition-On Ignition-Off

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.37 Accelerometer Configuration

Address: 467

Spare Enable Towed Use voltage Detection Movement Enable GPS Use
mode level Sensitivity Detection wake up upon "movement
assistance for type: movement for detection" by
0 - Disable 0 - Very
movement (movement / towing accelerometer
1 - Enable insensitive
detection engine status) detection for Start/Stop
1 - Normal
0 Disable (don't care if 0 Start/Stop
2 - Very bit 0 is set) alerts by
1 Enable 0 movement
sensitive status of
0 Don't use

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 46 of 237

3 - spare 1 engine 1 Use. Ignition switch

status (legacy),
1 Start/Stop
alerts by
movement
detection using
accelerometer.
If this bit is
enabled, all
the logic
normally
dependent on
status of
Ignition Switch
will be re-
linked to the
status of
Movement
detection.

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bits 3-4 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

5.2.38 Towed Mode Configuration

Address: 470

Reserved Enable Towed Enable Towed

Start/Stop Start/Stop
distress events

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bits 3-4 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 47 of 237

6 Communication and Configuration

6.1 Communication Events

6.2 Communication Settings

6.2.1 GPRS Settings

6.2.1.1 Acknowledge OTA

6.2.1.1.1 Message Transit Acknowledge Timeout

Address: 139
This parameter defines the maximum time the unit will wait for server to acknowledge a
plain event (plain events are one of the four available event generation patterns proposed
by Cellocator unit; refer to the Event Types section in this document). If no ACK is
received by this time, the event will be retransmitted.
Event Delivery Algorithm
Once generated, a plain event is stored in the units Log memory.
This Log memory can store up to 8946 plain events.
When the Log memory is full, newer events will push out the
older ones (FIFO). Events will be uploaded to the Control
Center only when GPRS is available and will be deleted from
the units Log memory only when acknowledgment is received Log memory queue Pending event
Up to 8946 events waiting for Ack
from Central Control. NOTE: Plain events will never be
delivered by SMS!
The unit supports one pending event waiting for server acknowledgment. When server
acknowledgment is received, the pending event is deleted from the Log memory head,
and the next event is moved to the pending event data structure in order to be sent to
the server.
NOTE: Legacy units used to have 16 concurrent pending events.
If the Acknowledge is not received during the time defined in Message Transit
Acknowledge Timeout, the event is resent.
Data format: 8-bit unsigned. Resolution is 20msec or 160mseconds, according to the
value of Acknowledge Timeout Extension Multiplier bit, see below.
Note that there is a separate control of ACK to forward data message from server to 3rd
party device connected to the serial port of the unit (application configuration byte 5).
Value span: 00h to FFh (=5.1sec or ~40 seconds)
Default value: 200 (4sec)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 48 of 237

6.2.1.1.2 Acknowledge Timeout Extension Multiplier

Address: 0 bit 6
If this bit is enabled (1) the resolution of Message Transit Acknowledge Timeout
parameter will be 160mseconds/bit, otherwise 20msec/bit
Default value: 1 (160mseconds/bit)

6.2.1.2 Anti-flooding
The Anti-Flooding mechanism is designed to minimize the units message Retransmissions
in situations where GPRS connection is available but the server is unreachable.
The Anti-flooding will randomize the idle communication time between message
retransmission sessions to avoid server overloading in situations where the server
becomes available after period of server unavailability and to avoid network overloading.

Configuration

Received Messages Anti-Flooding

Ack. Mechanism

Modem Reset

5 sessions 5 sessions
Pending 5 sessions
Message
Logged Events Events
Send Random
Queue Buffer
Process Communication
(up to 16) Idling
6 message
retransmissios

The block diagram above describes the Anti-Flooding mechanism. The Anti-Flooding
mechanisms most important input is the received server acknowledgment; in case there
are no acknowledge messages returned from the server, the Anti-Flooding mechanism
will implement the following retry patterns:
Send each pending message 6 times while waiting for ack. between each transmission.
Repeat the above sessions 5 times.
Stop transmissions for a random time based on Anti-Flooding timer and Anti-Flooding
randomization threshold configurable parameters (see Anti-Flooding timer, Anti-Flooding
randomization threshold). This random period is defined in the diagram as Random Communication
Idling.
Reset the modem.
Go to step 1.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 49 of 237

The Anti-Flooding has another sub operational mode called Intermediate state of Anti-
Flooding which when enabled blocks message transmission till only after IPUP is
acknowledged by the server. This operational mode will start logged events transmission
only after the server is guaranteed to be responsive. Enabling this mode will implement
the above Anti Flooding behavior only for IPUP messages while not saving IPUP events
into the log memory. Refer to Intermediate state of Anti-Flooding Activation Control. The
Intermediate Anti Flooding mode can be selected to work in Home network, Roam
network and in hibernation.

6.2.1.2.1 Anti-Flooding Timer

Address: 284
Description: This parameter defines a "communication idling" timeout, used by the unit
to decrease a communication costs during the server (CCC) failure.
Data format: 1 byte with a resolution of 1 minute
Value span: 0-255minutes, a value of zero means no delay between the sets
Default value: 0

6.2.1.2.2 Anti-Flooding Randomization Threshold

Address: 1353
Description: In case of server failure all the units are entering Anti-Flooding
simultaneously and, as a result, reconnecting to CC simultaneously after the Anti-Flooding
delay expires. This causes a heavy load of communication on the CC server and might
cause a new crash. In order to prevent this issue it is possible to randomize the Anti-
Flooding timer.
The timer is restarted every time with a different value, limited by a programmable
threshold.
(A Ta) Anti-flooding interval(A+ Ta)
A - Anti-flooding timer parameter
Ta - Anti-flooding threshold, programmed in EEPROM
Wrong programming protection:
if ATa the unit will NOT use the low limit of randomization.

Data format: Resolution of programmable threshold is 30 seconds, 1 byte

Value span: 0-127 minutes, a value of zero means no randomization
Default value: 0

6.2.1.2.3 Enable IP Up Alert (Event)

Address: 202, bit 2 for home network

204, bit 2 for roam network

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 50 of 237

Description: The "IP up" alert is generated with every dial-up to GPRS in order to
update the Central Control with the resent IP address of the unit. In cases when SIM card
is associated with static IP, it is possible to cancel IP up events.
Note that IP Up event CANNOT be disabled if Intermediate state of Anti-flooding is
enabled.
Default value: 1 both enabled

6.2.1.2.4 Intermediate state of Anti-Flooding Activation Control

Address: 202, bit 1 for home network

204, bit 1 for roam network
4, bit 1 for hibernation, if enabled for active GSM network
Description: If Intermediate state is enabled, the unit will not store IP Up events into log
memory. When dialing to GPRS, only IP Up messages will be sent to the server. The unit
will not try to download accumulated event before reception ACK to the IP Up message
(see Anti-flooding description above).
Default value: all three enabled (1). In CelloTrack family to save energy all three are
disabled.

6.2.1.3 Operational Server Support

The operational communication server is used for uploading positions and other events
from the end unit. Normally this will be a communication gateway of the Central Control
application.

6.2.1.3.1 Operational Server APN

Address: 36-65
Name in Programmer: APN
Description: This parameter contains an APN used upon dialing to an operational
communication server.
Data format: 30 bytes string, first byte is length
Value span: First byte 0 to 0x1D, second to 30th - ASCII characters
Default value: ASCII "internet"

6.2.1.3.2 Operational Server APN Username

Address: 8-31
Name in Programmer: GPRS PPP Username
Description: This parameter contains a PPP username used upon dialing to an APN
defined for operational server.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 51 of 237

Data format: 24 bytes string, first byte is length

Value span: First byte 0 to 0x17, second to 24th - ASCII characters
Default value: ASCII "test"

6.2.1.3.3 Operational Server APN Password

Address: 141-164
Name in Programmer: GPRS PPP Password
Description: This parameter contains a PPP password, used upon dialing to an APN
defined for operational server.
Data format: 24 bytes string, first byte is length
Value span: First byte 0 to 0x17, second to 24th ASCII characters
Default value: zeroes

6.2.1.3.4 Operational Server IP Address

Address: 66 to 69
Name in Programmer: Default Target IP Address (for GPRS)
Description: Stores an IP address of the operational server. All the messages (both
active and passive, irrespectively to the source of the incoming command) during normal
operation will be sent to this IP address.
If this parameter contains zeros, the unit will use an operational DNS instead.
Data format: 4 bytes IP address, Intel order (low significant bytes first)
Default value: 0.0.0.0 (change to the IP address of central command)

6.2.1.3.5 Operational Server DNS Address

Address: 2464-2495
Name in Programmer: Default target DNS Address (operational server)
Description: The Domain Name System (DNS) is a hierarchical naming system for
computers, services, or any resource connected to the Internet or a private network. It
translates domain names meaningful to humans into the numerical (binary) identifiers
associated with networking equipment for the purpose of locating and addressing these
devices worldwide.
In our case the DNS support is required in order to prevent a necessity to assign a static
IP to each of the servers (operational and maintenance).
A domain name usually consists of two or more parts (technically labels), which are
conventionally written separated by dots, such as example.com.

Cello supports down to 2 levels subdomains (e.g. XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX), maximum

length is 32 chars.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 52 of 237

Labels are restricted to a small subset of the ASCII character set known as LDH,
the Letters AZ in upper and lower case, Digits 09, Hyphen, and the dot to separate
LDH-labels; see RFC 3696 section 2 for details.
The DNS will be used for dial up only if the IP address field of the corresponding server
(in programming memory) is set to zero (e.g., 0.0.0.0).
If the IP address field of the corresponding server is not set to zero the unit shall use
this IP address for dial up.
Data format: 32 bytes string, first byte is length.

6.2.1.3.6 Listening UDP Port (while connected to both Operational Server or

Maintenance Server)

Address: 107-108
Name in Programmer: GPRS Self Port
Description: This parameter stores the listening UDP port. This should be the
"destination port" of incoming UDP messages, it will also be sent as a "source port" of an
outgoing transmissions.
Value resolution & span: 0- 65535
Default value: 231

6.2.1.3.7 Operational Server Target Port

Address: 109 -110

Description: This parameter stores the "destination port" of outgoing UDP or TCP
(depends on Modem Type code) messages while connected to the operational server. This
will be the also listening UDP or TCP port of target host.
Value resolution & span: 0- 65535
Default value: 231

6.2.1.3.8 Modem Type Code for Operational Server

Address: 74
Description: This parameter defines dial up type, which is differs according to the
communication platform and modem connected.
Valid values: According to the table below:

Value Network

0 UDP/IP over GPRS

1-3 Not supported

4 TCP/IP over GPRS

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 53 of 237

Default value: 0

6.2.1.4 Maintenance Server Support

The Cellocator unit supports a periodic connection to the maintenance server, which is
used as a Service & Support Server.
It is possible to set an additional APN, IP address, ports and dial up type for the
Maintenance Server; this server will be used for a periodical service communication
sessions.
It is also possible to force the unit to connect to the specific server manually, using the
OTA command (SMS or GPRS). If the command to connect to maintenance server is
received during the communication peak of full hibernation the unit will connect to
maintenance server upon the end of the peeking.
The unit periodically connects (completely drop an existing connection and redial using
the dedicated APN) to this server in order to check for the latest firmware and/or
programming update. It is possible to enable auto connection to the maintenance server
upon power up and upon firmware upgrade.
The connection to the maintenance server:

In TCP mode - TCP socket establishment and a Maintenance Platform Manifest* packet
paste into this socket.

In UDP mode - it will be just a Maintenance Platform Manifest* UDP packet delivery to
the Maintenance server and use listening port according to the configuration of the
maintenance server.
An acknowledge (OTA message type 4) should be received in with a defined timeout;
otherwise the platform manifest will be resent.
In case the unit cannot establish a connection to the maintenance server while the GPRS
is available, it will use a dial up retry algorithm defined in Anti-Flooding section of this
document.
If all the retries fail, the unit will stop trying and connect back to an operational server
(instead of entering Anti-Flooding, as it would do while connected to an operational
server).
If the timeout of periodical connection to the maintenance server expires while the unit is
hibernating, it will not wake up; instead it will dial the maintenance server immediately
after the next COM glancing.
It is possible to disable firmware upgrades or programming from the maintenance server.
The unit automatically disconnects from the maintenance server and connects back to its
operational communication server after 3 minutes after the last communication
transaction.
The unit does NOT send logged or distress events to the maintenance server. It keeps
logging events as usual during the maintenance session (except during firmware
upgrades) but does not upload them. The unit will reply to commands sent from a
maintenance server.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 54 of 237

Distress alerts and real time based alerts that occurred during the maintenance session
will be lost.
The unit will ignore the incoming voice calls and the incoming SMS notification during the
maintenance session (the SMS will be processed after the maintenance session end).
Outgoing voice call initiation attempts (both plain and emergency) are ignored during the
maintenance session.
After any reset occurred during the maintenance session (except the final reset of
firmware upgrade procedure, see bitmap below) the unit will connect back to the primary
server.

6.2.1.4.1 Enable Programming Updates from the Maintenance Server

Address: 1398, Bit 0

Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will accept updates of programming
parameters from maintenance server.
Default value: 0 - Disable

6.2.1.4.2 Enable Firmware Upgrade from the Maintenance Server

Address: 1398, Bit 1

Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will perform firmware upgrade if the process
will be initiated from maintenance server.
Default value: 0 - Disable

6.2.1.4.3 Enable Connection to the Maintenance Server on each Power-Up.

Address: 1398, Bit 2

Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will automatically connect to the maintenance
server upon each power up.
Default value: 0 - Disable

6.2.1.4.4 Reconnect to the Maintenance Server after Firmware Upgrade

Address: 1398, Bit 3

Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will automatically reconnect to the
maintenance server after firmware upgrade (irrespectively from what server, main or
backup, the upgrade was performed).
If this bit is disabled the unit will connect back to an operational server immediately upon
the end of the upgrade, without even validation of the upgrade process success.
Reconnection to the maintenance server after firmware upgrade is normally required in
order to validate successful firmware upgrade and to set up new added configuration
parameters.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 55 of 237

Default value: 0 - Disable

6.2.1.4.5 Enable Auto Connection to Maintenance Server

Address: 1398, Bit 4

Description: If this bit is disabled the unit will never try connecting to the maintenance
server automatically (even if enabled in previous bits), but it will still be possible to force
the unit to connect to the maintenance server by a command from OTA.
Default value: 0 - Disable

6.2.1.4.6 Maintenance Server Connection Period

Address: 1399
Description: This parameter defines a time between automatic maintenance sessions.
Maintenance server connection period will automatically randomize, in order to prevent a
load on the maintenance server, caused by simultaneous connection of multiple units.
The randomization is affected by a unit's ID in the following way:
Real period = Programmed Period + {last 2 digits of decimal repr. of unit's ID} [min]
Data format: 1 byte with a resolution of 90 minutes (1.5 hours).
Zero to disable automatic maintenance sessions
Value span: 0-15.9 days
Make sure to set a value different from zero while enabling this feature.
Default value: 16 dec (1 day)

6.2.1.4.7 Maintenance Server APN

Address: 1403-1432
Description: These parameters define a dedicated APN, used by the unit during GPRS
dial up only during a connection to the maintenance server.
Data format: 30 bytes string, first byte is length
Value span: First byte 0 to 0x1D, second to 30th - ASCII characters
Default value (Hex): 08 69 6E 74 65 72 65 61 6C 00

6.2.1.4.8 Maintenance Server APN Username

Address: 1626-1649
Description: This parameter contains a PPP username used upon dialing to an APN
defined for the maintenance server.
Data format: 24 bytes string, first byte is length
Value span: First byte 0 to 0x17, second to 24th - ASCII characters

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 56 of 237

Default value (Hex): 04 74 65 73 74 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 . 00

6.2.1.4.9 Maintenance Server APN Password

Address: 1650-1673
Description: This parameter contains a PPP password, used upon dialing to an APN
defined for the maintenance server.
Data format: 24 bytes string, first byte is length
Value span: First byte 0 to 0x17, second to 24th ASCII characters
Default value (Hex): 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

6.2.1.4.10 IP Address (for GPRS) for Maintenance Server

Address: 1392 to 1395

Description: Stores the target IP address used by the unit during a maintenance
session.
Data format: 4 bytes IP address, Intel order (low significant bytes first)
Default value: 62.90.141.201 (current main maintenance server)

6.2.1.4.11 Default Target DNS Address (Maintenance Server)

Address: 2394-2425
Description: As per the DNS for the operational server, described earlier in this
document.
The DNS will be used for dial up only if the Maintenance Server IP Address field is set to
zero (e.g., 0.0.0.0). If the IP address field is not set to zero, the unit will use this IP
address for dial up.
Data format: 32 bytes string, first byte is length

6.2.1.4.12 GPRS Target Port for Maintenance Server

Address: 1396-1397
Description: Those EEPROM cells store the "destination port" of outgoing UDP or TCP
messages (during the maintenance session). This will also be the listening UDP or TCP
port of target host.
Value resolution & span: 0 - 65535
Default value: 7435

6.2.1.4.13 Listening UDP Port for Maintenance Server

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 57 of 237

Address: 107 -108

Name in Programmer: Listening UDP Port
Description: As per for the operational server.

6.2.1.4.14 Modem Type Code for Maintenance Server

Address: 1391
Description: This parameter defines the connection type of the maintenance server.
Valid values: According to the table below:

Value Network

0 UDP/IP over GPRS

1-3 Not supported

4 TCP/IP over GPRS

Default value: 0

6.2.1.4.15 Maintenance Server Session Time Update

Address: 1400
Description: The maintenance server will use default 3 Min session timeout when first
connecting to the C+ server. After the first message arrives from the maintenance server
to the unit, the FW will cancel the 3 Min time out, or what is left of it, and replace it with
a new session timeout value defined by this parameter.
Valid values: Min time 30 Sec: 3
Resolution: 10 Sec
Default value: 90 Seconds

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 58 of 237

6.2.2 SMS Settings

6.2.2.1 SMS Destination Address

Addresses: 187-196
Description: Stores the default target address used by the unit. Under normal
circumstances, this will be the SMS number of the SMS server of central control.
Note that this parameter defines only the default target address, which will be used only
for active transmissions (i.e. transmissions that are automatically generated by the unit).
Passive transmissions (i.e. replies for commands and queries) will be sent to the address
that generated the command/query.
Data format (GSM-SMS): First byte should contain the total amount of digits that make
up the actual address (not including address type byte). Second byte is the address type
byte, which should be 91h for international address (recommended type to use, to allow
roaming) or 81h for local address. The rest of the bytes contain the actual address,
encoded in BCD. The order of the transmission is bytes with lower address first, lower
nibbles (nibble = 4 bit) first. If only the lower nibble of a byte is used (this is legal only in
the last byte in case this is the last digit of the address), the higher nibble should have
all of its bits set (the nibble should contain 15 dec). The rest of the bytes that are not
used should contain FFh.
Default value: NULL.

6.2.2.2 SMS Center Address

Addresses: 177 186

Name in Programmer: SMSC Address
Description: This parameter stores the address of the cellular operators SMS center.
This parameter is applicable only for units that make use of SMS.
Data format (GSM-SMS): First byte should contain the total amount of bytes that
actually contain the address (including address type byte). Second byte is the address
type byte, which should be 91h for international address (recommended type to use, to
allow roaming) or 81h for local address. The rest of the bytes contain the actual address,
encoded in BCD. The order of the transmission is bytes with lower address first, lower
nibbles (nibble = 4 bit) first. If only the lower nibble of a byte is used (this is legal only in
the last byte in case this is the last digit of the address), the higher nibble should have
all of its bits set (the nibble should contain dec 15). The rest of the bytes that are not
used should contain FFh.
This number has to be either left blank or set to the correct value; otherwise the unit will
not be able to send any SMS message.
Example: If the parameter contains 07h 91h 79h 52h 14h 32h 54h F6h FFh, the address
that will be used is the international address +972-54-123456, from left to right.
Default value: NULL (blank).

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 59 of 237

6.2.3 Comm. Permissions in Home/Roam Network

6.2.3.1 Enable GPRS

Address: In home network 201 bit 2, in Roam network 203 bit 2, in hibernation 3, bit 2
(see the following parameter).
Description: If this parameter is enabled the unit will utilize GPRS whenever possible as
a default communication channel.
Default value: Enabled (1) In Home network, Disabled (0) in Roaming

6.2.3.2 Renew GPRS upon Drop (in Hibernation, GPS Peeking)

Address: 3, bit 2
Description: If GPRS is enabled, the unit will try maintaining GPRS session active all the
time, even if there is no data to transfer (for example on parking, during one of the
hibernation modes).
Due to resource reasons the GPRS network is searching for an idling connections and
actively shutting them down. Once the connection is down - the unit will try redialing the
network and generate an additional useless traffic and charge.
If this bit is disabled, the unit will not renew the GPRS session during hibernation upon
drop. The session will be restored only in case the unit is leaving hibernation due to an
Ignition On or Distress Session.
This bit can also be disabled when it is required to prevent GPRS dial up during GSM
peeks (in full hibernation only).
Default: 1 (renew session)

6.2.3.3 Enable SMS

Address: In home network 201 bit 7, in Roam network 203 bit 7

Description: If this parameter is enabled the unit will respond to a valid incoming SMS
commands and generate an active distress and real-time messages (if enabled in the next
parameter) when GPRS is not available.
Default value: Enabled in both Home and Roaming (1)

6.2.3.4 Enable Active Transmissions via SMS

Address: In home network 202 bit 4, in Roam network 204 bit 4

Description: If this parameter is disabled, the unit will not generate any active SMS
traffic (distress or real-time, except the "Wake Up" SMS messages, see description
below), even if SMS communication is enabled in previous parameter.
Default value: Disabled (1)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 60 of 237

6.2.3.5 Enable Data Forwarding from Serial Port to SMS

Address: In home network 202 bit 5, in Roam network 204 bit 5

Description: If this parameter is disabled, the unit will not try forwarding data from a 3rd
party device connected to unit's COM port (over CSP or Transparent Data protocols)
through SMS, even if both of the two previous parameters are enabled.
It is also possible to disable forwarding data through separately for Hibernation only (on
address 4, bit 5).
If this bit is enabled the data will be forwarded through SMS only if:
1. GPRS is unavailable or disabled
2. The length of payload is not bigger than 82 bytes.
Note that OTA ACK is not required for data forwarded by SMS. The "SMS Sent"
indication from the GSM network is considered as a convenient confirmation.
Default value: Disabled (1)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 61 of 237

6.2.4 COM port settings

Note that not all the available options are currently supported.

6.2.4.1 Baud rate

Address: 471, bits 0-3

Description: Defines the baud rate of unit's COM, as per the table below:
Note: If CFE device is enabled on this port, the unit will fixate on 460800 baud rate,
ignoring the configured value.

Value (dec) Baud rate (bps) Currently

supported

0 110

1 300

2 600

3 1200

4 2400

5 4800

6 9600
7 14400

8 19200
9 38400

10 56000

11 57600

12 115200 (default)

13 128000

14 256000

15 460800
Default: 12

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 62 of 237

6.2.4.2 Parity

Address: 472, bits 0-2

Description: Defines the parity of unit's COM as per the table below:

Value (dec) Parity Currently supported

0 No Parity (default)

1 Odd Parity

2 Even Parity

3 Mark Parity

4 Space Parity

5-7 Unused

Default: 0

6.2.4.3 Stop Bits

Address: 472, bits 3-4

Description: Defines the stop bits of unit's COM, as per the table below:

Value (dec) Stop Bits Currently supported

0 One Stop Bit (default)

1 1.5 Stop Bits

2 Two stop bits

3 Unused

Default values: 0

6.2.4.4 Flow Control

Address: 472, bits 5-6

Description: Defines the flow control of unit's COM, as per the table below:

Value (dec) Flow Control Currently supported

0 No Flow Control (default)

1 Software flow
control

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 63 of 237

Value (dec) Flow Control Currently supported

2 Hardware flow
control

3 Unused

Default values: 0

6.2.5 1-Wire port settings

6.2.5.1 Enabling Reading 256-bit EEPROM of DS1971 and Authentication by

Group ID

Address: 1349, bit 3

Description: By default the unit is supporting reading unique iButton identifier from any
family of iButtons and using it as a driver authentication. In most cases DS1990A Dallas
keys (family ID 01) are used for this purpose.
The DS1971 (the family code of DS1990A is 01h; the family code of DS1971 is 14h)
provides, in addition to the unique iButton identifier, a 256-bit EEPROM, containing 10
decimal digits.
In our unit we use this storage in order to store group ID and User ID (refer to Extended
Driver Authentication section below in this document).
If this bit is enabled (1), and DS1971 is attached, the unit will:
1) Ignore the unique iButton identifier of the attached DS1971
2) Read 10 decimal digits from the 256-bit EEPROM of the attached DS1971
3) Treat them as User ID and Group ID: high digits represent a Group ID and lower
digits a User ID.
The Group ID length is variable and set up during units initialization (refer to the
Extended Driver Authentication section).
Assuming that the number programmed in the EEPROM of DS1971 is 1234567890, and
Group ID length is considered upon initialization as 4 digits, the Group ID of the same
iButton will be 1234 and User ID will be 567890.
Otherwise, if the corresponding bit is enabled but other type of iButton is attached
(different from DS1971), the unit will use the 48 bits of the unique ID of the attached
iButton as a driver or passenger ID and 9999 as a group number.
Upon recognition of the new iButton, the unit generates an OTA message type 0, with
Transmission reason (Byte 19) = 46 - Driver Authentication Update.
Byte 18 (STR) of the same message includes notifications of Group recondition and user
type.

Group ID status Unused User Type

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 64 of 237

"1" authenticated, "0" Driver ID

"0" not authenticated "1" Passenger ID

Bit 7 Bits 1-6 Bit 0

The entire 10 bytes number (Group and User) received from the EEPROM of DS1971 will
be transmitted by the unit in any outgoing message type 0 in a six bytes Dallas field as
follows (after applying Little Endian):

78 56 34 12 00
90
Byte 34 Byte 35 Byte 36 Byte 37 Byte 38
Byte 33

If the Reading EEPROM of DS1971" Programming bit is disabled (0), and DS1971 (or any
other type of iButton) is attached, the unit will work according to the legacy Driver ID
algorithms.

6.2.5.2 Driver Authentication by Group ID

If the Reading EEPROM of DS1971" Programming bit is enabled (1), the Group ID is used
to enable cancellation of vehicle's immobilization by any company driver without
programming code of each one to unit's memory.
The Group ID is programmed as one of the Dallas codes (in the array of 30), its length
varies from 1 to 9 bytes length but shorter than 10 digits. The unit supports multiple
groups, while all Group IDs are from the same length. Any additional number, shorter
than 10 digits but with length different from the first Group ID length, is considered a
driver id.

Initialization

Is extended
support of DS1971
enabled?

No
Yes
Search the IDs array
for the first number
shorter than 10 chars

Set detected length as

lengh of group ID

End (proceed with

initialization)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 65 of 237

NOTE: Group ID numbers never begin from zero.

If Reading EEPROM of DS1971 is enabled in the programming, upon reception of data
from DS1971 first bytes will be considered the "Group ID".
If Reading EEPROM of DS1971 is enabled in the programming and other type of iButton is
attached (not DS1971), upon reception of data from iButton the 9999 is recorded as a
Group ID, but the unit will use the 48 bits of the unique ID of the attached iButton as a
driver or passenger ID.
The received "Group ID" is compared with programmed Dallas codes and if it matches:

The status of Group ID recognition in the last bit of TR Specific byte of "Driver
Authentication Update" event changes to "1" authenticated

The unit releases immobilizer (only if the immobilizer was activated automatically),
even if the Driver/Passenger ID is not in the list.
If Reading EEPROM of DS1971 is NOT enabled in the programming the unit will not use
Group ID at all

6.2.6 Data Forwarding from COM Port

In previous versions (prior to FW 31c) the only OTA transport of forwarded data was OTA
msg type 8.
The length of payload in this message was limited to 82 bytes in all the cases except
transparent data forwarding, where this limit was extended to 235 bytes.
It was not possible to link between the packet forwarded from COM port and location update.
From version 31c the data forwarding capabilities extended in the following way:

Capability to escort messages, forwarded from 3rd party terminal (or Garmin) with
plain fleet management (FM) data (like Dallas, status of inputs, location and time),
normally supplied in OTA message type 0. The new structure, containing forwarded
data with FM packet and unique ID is called "container"

Capability to forward up to 512 bytes of forwarded from 3rd party terminal data or the
entire container encapsulated into a single message over Cellocator Wireless Protocol
(without logging).

Capability to log forwarded from 3rd party terminal data (or the entire container) as a
set of fragments (OTA message type 7). In this case the forwarded from 3rd party
terminal data (or the entire container) will be delivered similarly to a delivery of the
plain events.
It is possible to introduce features 2 to 4 as a 2x2 selection table, where only one cell can
be selected at any time:

Forward as pure data Forward as container

including the pure data,
FM data and unique ID

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 66 of 237

Forward in single packet

OTA w/o logging

Forward as set of logged

fragments

6.2.6.1 Forward Data as a Container

Address: 285, bit 6

Description: If this bit is enabled (1), once the forwarded data packet is received in a
RAM buffer, the payload is escorted by additional fields and converted in a structure
called "the container".
The container is a data structure, created by the unit in its RAM buffer upon reception of
the data for forwarding from COM port (in enabled in this bit).
The forwarded payload in escorted by 48 bytes of FM (fleet management) data (attached
after the last byte of payload) and total length of payload + FM data (first 2 bytes of the
container, before the first byte of the container).
Every container is assigned by 6 bits numerator (increased every packet reception from
COM port), used in fragmentation process and reported with the container. The indication
bit of report Forwarded Message Code byte in this case will contain '1' - Container.

Forwarded The Container

Message
Code
A sequential Length of container The payload of forwarded data X 48 bytes of fleet management
7 bits ID of (2 bytes) data
the container
+ indication
bit (Single Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 3 + X Byte 3+
byte) X+48

If this bit is disabled (0), the payload is forwarded as is received from COM port, without
any additional conversion. The indication bit of report Forwarded Message Code byte in
this case will contain zero.
Default: 0 - Disable

6.2.6.2 Enable Data Forwarding Through Log

Address: 285 bit 7

Description: If this bit is Disabled (0), the system will forward data (the pure payload or
the container) using OTA message type 8 directly from the RAM buffer.
Single OTA type 8 messages can contain the following:

Pure forwarded payload up to 512 bytes

The container, where 512 bytes of forwarded data payload are escorted by 48 bytes of
fleet management data and 2 more bytes of container length (total 562 bytes);

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 67 of 237

If it is set (1), the received data will be fragmented.

The container (or the payload to forward, as per the programming) is fragmented by
chunks of 54 bytes long (last one is zero-padded); chunks are enumerated and equipped
by new fragmentation control fields, stored in an events log memory and then uploaded
using an existing infrastructure as message type 7.
As per existing message types which are utilizing log memory (0 and 9), message type 7:

Continues the Message Numerator used by other logged messages.

Requires acknowledge from the server (Message type 4) in order to erase the specific
message from the log.

Utilizes the same retransmission algorithms as other logged message types.

6.2.3.2.1 Data Path Chart

Forwarded The Container

Fragmented Container
Fragment 1 Fragment 2 Fragment n Last fragment
54 first 4 bytes of 54 bytes of 4 bytes of 54 bytes of 4 bytes of 54 bytes 4 bytes of
bytes of fragment container fragment container fragment of fragment
container, manageme management management container management
starting nt (zero
from length padded)

Default: 0 - Disable

6.2.6.3 Enable Backward Compatible OTA Msg 8

Address 1349, bit 2

The legacy data forwarding mechanism was utilizing a data fragmentation due to a small
buffer size (Garmin mode only).
In current implementation legacy fragment control byte of OTA message type 8 is not
used, since the unit is able to forward "the container" in a single message.
The Fragment Control byte of OTA message type 8 will therefore always contain value of
0xC0.
If this bit indicates backward compatible (0) the unit will restore legacy structure of OTA
Msg type 8 by:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 68 of 237

1. Fragmenting Garmin traffic to fragments of max 82 bytes of payload and using

Fragment Control byte for fragmentation control.
2. Limiting size of forwarded payload in Transparent Mode to 235 bytes.
If this bit indicates extended (1) the unit will use extended structure of OTA Msg type 8
by allowing size of forwarded payload in Transparent Mode to 512 bytes.

Default value: 0 - Backward compatible

6.2.6.4 Enable OTA ACK to Forward from OTA to Serial Data Packet

Address 1348 bit 0

Description: If this bit is enabled (1) the ACK (Msg type 0, TR31) will be sent from
Cellocator unit to the CCC upon reception of Data forwarding frame.
Default: Enabled (1)

6.2.7 Distress Session Configuration

A Distress Session is one of four possible ways to deliver data to a Central Control (refer
to the Event Types generated by Cellocator devices section).
If the condition for the specific event is met, the unit will create a series of messages with
the same transmission reason. The messages will be uploaded to the Control Center
immediately with the first available communication transport (during IP session over IP,
otherwise by SMS). The messages are not stored in the memory and if there is no cellular
coverage at the moment of sending the message will be lost. Distress events do not
require any kind of acknowledge.
The number and time between messages in Distress Session is defined in parameters
below, but can be temporary overwritten by Distress Session initiation OTA command.
Distress session caused by the same trigger, occurred while the first session is not over
yet restarts the session from the beginning.
Distress session caused by different trigger, occurred while the first session is not over
yet causes new distress session (up to 5 distress sessions might be maintained
concurrently). The 6th distress session, while previous 5 are still active, will be lost.
It is also possible to initiate an endless (or specified duration) distress session by
command from CCC. Upon start, this session cancels all active distress sessions. The
session will be stopped by any other distress session or by a command from OTA.

6.2.7.1 Time between Distress Transmissions

Address: 72-73
Description: This parameter defines the amount of time between two consecutive
Distress Transmissions in distress session initiated by trigger of distress event.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 69 of 237

The amount and the period of distress events generated during session initiated by OTA
command is defined by the command itself.
Data Format: 16-bit unsigned integer, 0.01 seconds resolution
Legal values span: 01h to FFFFh 65535 (~11minutes)
Default value: 1000 (10 seconds)

6.2.7.2 Number of Distress Transmissions

Address: 75
Description: This parameter defines the amount of transmissions that will be generated
in a single distress session triggered by internal logic, if no more sensors are triggered.
The maximum time of single distress session is [this parameter]*[time between
transmissions]. Take into account up to another second per transmission (this is the time
that it takes the unit to prepare and arrange a transmission).
NOTE: A Distress session initiated by OTA command will contain the number of messages
specified in a command.
Legal values span: 01h (one transmission) through 00FFh (255 transmissions). 0 is
illegal.
Default value: 1

6.2.8 Wake Up Messages

In most of the cases the unit is sent to the installation site programmed with operational
PL file, but without a SIM card. The SIM card is being inserted on installation site.
In order to create an automatic association of the unit with the SIM number in CCC
application, the unit initiates a real-time message using SMS or GPRS, according to the
bitmap below.
In case Wake Up message has not been sent due to server side issue triggering Anti
flooding condition, The Wake Up message counter will be reset and the Number Of
Repetition counting will start again from 0.

6.2.8.1 Enable SMS Wake Up

Address: 1344, bit 6

Description: An SMS message/s (number is set in repetitions field of the same byte) will
be sent to the Default Destination SMS address upon power up, after successful
registration into Home or Roam GSM network, respectively to SMS rules (like pre-
programmed GSM operators selection, active transmissions block etc).
The SMS Wake up event does not require any type of ACK. The message shall be
retransmitted in case error.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 70 of 237

NOTE: The wake up message will be transmitted even if active transmissions are
disabled. In addition, the time between Wake up SMS repeated messages will be 40
seconds (except for the CelloTrack Nano, in which the time between emergency
transmissions will be shorter but still dependent on network responses).
NOTE: In CelloTrack and CelloTrack-T, Wake up SMS will be sent every time the unit is
moved between Inactive to Active states.
Default value: 0 - disabled

6.2.8.2 Enable GPRS Wake Up

Address: 1344, bit 7

Description: The message will be sent to the Default Destination IP address upon power
up, after successful registration into Home or Roam GSM network, and dial up to GPRS,
respectively to GPRS rules (like pre-programmed GSM operators selection etc). The
message requires ACK (standard type 4 message). If ACK is not received, it will be resent
limited number of times, as configured in "Number of Repetitions" parameter (address
1344, bits 0-5).
Default value: 0 - disabled

6.2.8.3 Number of Repetitions

Address: 1344, bits 0-5

Description: This parameter defines the amount of SMS/GPRS Wake Up messages. In
case of failure during sending Wake Up event via GPRS (ACK is not received), the unit will
try to resend the message with a period configured in "Time between Distress
Transmissions" parameter (address 72). Every time a new GPRS session is established,
the repetition counter is reset to 0 and the count is restarted.
Default: 5

6.2.9 Offline Tracking

Important: This feature is applicable to Cello and CelloTrack V28.
This mode is designed to enable offline data logging. During this mode the modem of the
unit remains off, although the GPS, processor and all the peripherals are managed by
unit's logic as usual. The unit is generating and storing logged events in its non-volatile
memory and once a day establish a connection to upload all of them during a single
communication session.
The modem is also temporarily switches on upon trigger of distress session (in this
session only the distress event itself is sent).
The communication session for accumulated data upload will be initiated in the following
cases:

At the end of trip (upon expiration of the dedicated timeout after the Stop alert)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 71 of 237

Upon filling of 90% of memory capacity

Upon expiration of Logged Events Upload Periodic Timer

Upon reaching a certain amount of logged events

6.2.9.1 Enable Offline Tracking

Address: 1348, bit 6

If this bit is enabled (1) the unit switches the modem on and initiate the GPRS session
only when data download is required (see below). The rest of the time the modem
remains off.
Upon the end of data upload process the session and the modem is shut down.
The modem will also be switched on during distress sessions and real time alerts (Wake
up etc).
In case of wake up due to distress session (or real time alert) the modem will be switched
off after transmission of the last message (any valid Cellocator message will extend this
timeout by an additional 10 seconds).
Switching the modem on followed by GPRS dial up is initiated by the unit upon:

At the end of trip (upon expiration of the dedicated timeout after the Stop alert)

Upon filling of 90% of memory capacity

Upon expiration of Logged Events Upload Periodic Timer

Upon reaching a certain amount of logged events

After modem's wake up it will try to register into a GSM network. If the registration is not
accomplished during timeout, defined in "Maximum Network Registration Time" (address
270), the modem will be switched off until next wake up.
Any modem reset, occurred during the upload session, will be followed by modem wake
up and registration attempt as per "Maximum Network Registration Time" (address 270).
If the GSM registration is successful, the unit will get more time to dial up GPRS and
deliver the first message from the log (the total time from modem wake up is "Maximum
Network Registration Time" + 90 seconds, independently from the exact moment of GSM
registration). If during this timeout the unit failed to establish GPRS session and deliver
the first message - the modem shall be switched off until next wake up.
The unit will not switch off the modem while data transfer is in process;
The modem will be switched off:

While log is not empty: 90 seconds after last message reception (in case of session
drop or server failure).

While log is empty: 10 seconds after last valid message reception (including ACK)

For CelloTrack T and Cellotrack Nano, this timeout is configurable via "Timeout before
switching off the modem" parameter.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 72 of 237

Once the dial up attempts stop for one of the reasons described above, no more GPRS
dialup attempts (or modem wakes up followed by GPRS dial up attempts) will be made
until Stop Journey is detected. After such an event, dial up attempts will start again as
described above.
Maintenance Session, if enabled, will start immediately after ANY data session occurred
after periodical maintenance timeout expiration. In such a case the modem will be
switched off after the end of the maintenance session. There is no dedicated modem
wake up for maintenance session.
Serial data Forward mechanism (MDT, Garmin, transparent data ...) will behave in next
manner during offline mode:

During modem wake up due to Emergency session, then the data forwarded from
COM port will be forwarded to the server.

During modem wake up due to Ignition OFF or memory overfilling, then the data will
be lost.
Default: 0

6.2.9.2 Timeout before switching off the modem

Address: 220
This timer is restarted every time a data packet is received (to allow the server time to
send necessary commands to the unit, if needed), when the log is not empty (i.e. not all
logged events were uploaded to the server). Note that the FW limits this parameter to be
minimum 30 seconds, so any programmed value under 30 seconds would be treated as
30 seconds.
After completion of uploading all of the logged events (i.e. the log is empty), the unit is
switching off the modem after 10 seconds (hardcoded).
Resolution: 2 seconds/bit
Default value: 90 seconds

6.2.9.3 Auto Upload after Ignition Off Event

Address: 255, bit 0

Description: If this bit is enabled (1), the unit will wake up the modem and establish
GPRS session upon expiration of a timeout (Time to Auto-Upload) after a Stop alert.
Default: 0

6.2.9.4 Auto Upload upon Memory Overflow

Address: 255, bit 1

Description: If this bit is enabled (1), the unit will wake up the modem and establish
GPRS session upon detection of memory overflow (90% full).
Default: 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 73 of 237

6.2.9.5 Time to Auto Upload after Trip Stop

Address: 259 260

Description: This parameter defines time interval between Trip Stop and GPRS dial up
for data upload. Disabling the automatic upload at trip stop is done by "Auto Upload after
Ignition Off Event" parameter (address 255, bit 0).
Value resolution & span: Resolution is 4 Seconds. Span from: 4 seconds (0x0001), to
18:12 Hours (0xFFFF).
Default value: 5400, (0x1518h), 1.5 Hours

6.2.9.6 Logged Events Auto Upload Timer

Address: 218 219

Description: This parameter defines the period for periodical auto-upload of events
accumulated during Offline mode. 0 cancels periodical auto upload.
Value resolution & span: Resolution is 1 minutes. Span from: 1 minute to 65535
minutes. 0 disables the periodic upload.
Default value: 0

6.2.9.7 Logged Events Amount for Upload Offline Events

Address: 215
Description: This parameter defines the amount of logged events for upload of events
accumulated during Offline mode. 0 cancels the amount dependent upload.
Value resolution & span: Resolution is 1 event. Span from: 1 to 255 events.
Default value: 0

6.2.9.8 Number of Logged Events Upload Retries

Address: 221
Description: This parameter defines the number of logged events upload retries (in case
of no GSM connection when attempting to upload logged events). 0 cancels the retry
mechanism.
Value resolution & span: Resolution is 1 retry. Span from: 1 to 255 retries.
Default value: 0

6.2.9.9 Time Between Logged Events Upload Retries

Address: 222
Description: This parameter defines the time between logged events upload retries (in
case of no GSM connection when attempting to upload logged events).

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 74 of 237

Value resolution & span: Resolution is 10 seconds. Span from: 10 to 250 seconds.
Default value: 0

6.2.10 Cell ID Based Location (Neighborhood list of the serving GSM cell)
Please note that CellID is not supported if UMTS band is selected in units with 3G
modem.
The Cell ID triangulation is an alternative location method. In cases when the GPS is not
available information regarding in-range cellular towers (Cells) with known location, along
with signal power or SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) indication, might be used for location
approximation of the transmitting device.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 75 of 237

-105dbm

-90dbm
-90dbm

-75dbm

~0.75km
~1.5km

~1km

-75dbm

-90dbm

-105dbm

The location of the transmitting vehicle in respect with the in-range cells and the RF
signal propagation attributes which can be significantly affected by reflectors, black spots,
interference, etc. all of this may influence the relative reliability of the SNR indication as
an estimator for the distance of the vehicle from the receiving Cell.
How does it work with Cellocator unit?
When the unit loses a GPS signal for longer than 2 minutes, it will poll modem for Cell ID
information. The modem will update with the following parameters of up to 7 cells (the
serving cells and up to 6 neighbor cells):

Base station identification code

Cell ID

Location Area Code

Received signal strength in dBm

The message, containing this information and CellID retrieval timestamp, will accompany
any log or distress message (as per configuration) generated by Cellocator unit during
GPS coverage loss.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 76 of 237

Positioning software performs a triangulation calculation on the information and the data
is converted into a geographical location: strongest reception signal theoretically defines
closest cells.
Conditions to consider GPS coverage loss and restore
The GPS coverage loss in is considered when:

The GPS is communicating (connected)

The location appears as invalid for longer than 2 minutes in Standby mode or timeout,
programmed in "GPS Max On time" parameter in hibernation mode.
The recovery from Cell ID state is to GPS coverage state, in standby (i.e. not Hibernation)
mode, happens when the GPS location is considered valid continuously for more than 1
minute or as in PL parameter 500/1 "GPS Navigation Start_Stop filter" in hibernation
mode.
Behavior during No GPS Mode
Once the "NO GPS" mode is started, the unit is polling Cell ID neighborhood information
from modem periodically, every 1 minute.
The data session (to operational server only) is suspended during polling, the connection
does not drop. Messages generated during Cell ID polling are delivered after data mode is
restored.
The Cell ID neighborhood data is stored in a unit and delivered as an additional message
to a central control after any event or distress message. The additional message contains
the next sequential message numerator for easy correlation.

In 3G networks, information of the neighbor cells is not available. Thus, the modem is
polled for current serving cell extended data, which may include sector data, which in turn
may improve determining the unit location.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 77 of 237

6.2.10.1 Enable Generation of Logged Cell ID Escorting Packet

Address: 201, bit 3 in Home Network

203, bit 3 in Roam Network
Description: If this flag is enabled, the unit will generate logged message type 9, (sub
data type 9) following any logged message type 0 while the GPS location is considered as
invalid.
The logged messages type 9/9 will be stored in the same buffer as corresponding
messages type 0 and use the same sequence of numerator for easy correlation.
The message type 9.9 will not be generated if the unit is not logged into GSM.
Default: 0 - Disabled

6.2.10.2 Enable Generation of Real Time Cell ID Escorting Packet

Address: 201, bit 4 in Home Network

203, bit 4 in Roam Network
Description: If this flag is enabled, the unit will generate real time message type 9, (sub
data type 9) following any distress message type 0 while the GPS reading is considered as
invalid.
The real time messages type 9/9 will be delivered using the same rules as the
corresponding distress messages type 0 and use the same sequence of numerator for
easy correlation.
Default: 0 Disabled

6.2.10.3 Enable Generation of Unconditional Logged Cell ID Escorting Packet5

Address: 201, bit 0 in Home Network

203, bit 0 in Roam Network
Description: If this flag is enabled, the unit will generate logged message type 9 (sub
data type 0x09/0x0C for 2G/3G) following any logged message type 0.
Default: 0 - Disabled

6.2.10.4 Enable Generation of Unconditional Real Time Cell ID Escorting

Packet6

Address: 201, bit 1 in Home Network

203, bit 1 in Roam Network

6
Available only for CR300B (New Platform) from FW version 43m and later, and for CR300B
(Legacy) from FW version 43l and later.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 78 of 237

Description: If this flag is enabled, the unit will generate real time message type 9 (sub
data type 0x09/0x0C for 2G/3G) following any distress message type 0.
Default: 0 Disabled

6.2.11 Internal Accelerometer Configuration

Movement Detection: The Cello unit can reliably detect movement start /end using its
onboard accelerometer, similarly to a technique implemented in CelloTrack. This
capability shall allow releasing an Ignition input for general usage or add another
dimension for movement detection: ignition switch separate from movement detection.
It is possible to select movement detection source programmatically: Ignition input
(backward compatible mode) or accelerometer.
If Start/Stop detection using accelerometer is enabled, the unit reassigns all the
functionality based on the status of Ignition to the status of movement.
Examples of such functionality: Start/Stop alerting, Driver Authentication, Hibernation
mode change etc.
The ignition input becomes a general purpose discrete pulled down input, monitored in
OTA and Serial messages. It might still be used for Ignition Switch status monitoring, but
operational mode will be switched according to movement status:

The unit changes its operational mode to STBEOn if movement is detected for longer
than defined in "Start Event time filter" programmable parameter on address 104.

The unit changes its operational mode to STBEOff if lack of movement is detected for
longer than defined in "Stop Event time filter" programmable parameter on address
105.
Towing Detection: The Cello unit shall be able to reliably detect towing using its
onboard accelerometer. The feature shall be applicable when:

A movement detection source is selected from ignition input.

The ignition switch is switched off, in other words - during parking.

Upon movement detection during parking the unit will wake up from hibernation,
alternatively generate an alert, then trigger legacy towing detection feature, based on
GPS data.

6.2.11.1 Movement detection type

Address 467, bits 2

Description: This bit enables selection of movement detection type: either actual vehicle
movement detection or engine operational mode change detection (engine start and
switch off).
Note: If accelerometer is set as an engine status detector the Stop Event generation
may be delayed for (up to) 8 seconds (after expiration of the Stop Event filter).

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 79 of 237

Values span: 0 - movement, 1 engine status

Default value: 0 - movement

6.2.11.2 Accelerometer Sensitivity

Address 467, bits 3-4

Description: It is possible to calibrate the sensitivity of the internal accelerometer (3
levels) and to adapt it to any vehicle. The default value of 1 is adapted to detect
movement start/end in standard private vehicle. In case of truck it is recommended to
decrease the sensitivity level, in case of very silent vehicle to increase it.
Values span: 0 - Very insensitive, 1 Normal, 2 - Very sensitive, 3 - Spare
Default value: 1 Normal
Note: The Accelerometer Sensitivity feature is applicable also in CelloTrack T units from
FW version 61c.

6.2.11.3 Movement Detection Source

Address 467, bit 0

Description: This bit defines what source will be used for movement detection: internal
accelerometer or Ignition input. If Accelerometer source is selected, all the logic normally
dependent on status of Ignition Switch will be re-linked to the status of Movement
detection.
Values span:
0 Start/Stop alerts by status of Ignition switch (backward compatible mode)
1 Start/Stop alerts by movement detection using accelerometer
Default value: 0 backward compatible mode.

6.2.11.4 Voltage Assistance for Movement Detection

Address 467, bit 5

Description: This bit enables usage of voltage level in addition to "movement detection"
by accelerometer for Start/Stop detection.
Values span:
0 Disable
1 Enable

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 80 of 237

Default value: 0 Disable

6.2.11.5 Movement Detection: IgnitionOn Voltage Level Threshold

Address 468
Description: This parameter is relevant when Bits 5 and 0 of address 467 are set.
The vehicles battery voltage level is used as an additional source of information to
improve the vehicles movement state decision. We assume that when the vehicles
motor is on, the alternator starts generating electrical power to charge the battery and
thus the battery voltage increases. The Cello will detect this voltage increase and use it as
a necessary condition before it starts to analyze the accelerometers readings. The
combination of voltage level increase and accelerations indicates the vehicle is moving.
The Start Event shall be registered if movement by ACC is detected and the voltage of the
main battery is higher than this parameter during the entire Start Event registration
timeout.
The Stop Event shall be registered if NO movement by ACC is detected and the voltage of
the main battery is lower than this threshold during the entire Stop Event registration
timeout.
Data format: 8-bit unsigned, 0.1176470588235V/bit
Default value: 12.76V

6.2.12 Roaming List, GSM Operator Management

The non-volatile configuration is storing a list of 100 Public Land Mobile Networks (GSM
operators) with their priorities.
The end unit continuously* monitors a GSM operators (PLMNs) available on the air and
dynamically selects the best cost effective operator according to the pre-programmed
priority assigned to each one.
*The GSM operator selection mechanism is activated in 2 cases:
Periodically, according to pre-programmed timer
Upon new GSM registration, caused by reset or leaving the area covered by previously
selected network.
After one of the conditions listed above becomes true the state machine takes control
over the process and selects the best operator based on the list in the configuration
memory.

6.2.12.1 Timer of Auto Search

Address: 1008
Description: This parameter defines a timer, used by the system to repeat search of
available GSM networks in the air. The timer restarts each time when the unit is taking
decision to register in a specific PLMN, irrespectively to the result of registration attempt.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 81 of 237

Data format: The parameter is an 8-bit integer, resolution of 10 minutes.

Value span: 1 to 255 (10 minutes to 2550 minutes, zero is automatically translated into
30 minutes)
Default value: 6

6.2.12.2 Consider Unknown Operators as Forbidden

Address: 1348, bit 5

Description: If this flag is set, any PLMN not listed in the programming will be
considered as forbidden.
Otherwise, if this bit is 0, any PLMN not listed in the programming will be considered as
enabled with lowest priority.
Default value: zero (not forbidden)

6.2.12.3 Number of PLMNs Programmed

Address: 1009
Description: This parameter defines a number of active records in PLMN table.
Zero value cancel Roaming List Management feature.
Value span: 0 to 100
Default value: zero

6.2.12.4 Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMN)

Addresses:

Address Value

1010-1012 PLMN 1

1013-1015 PLMN 2

. .

1307-1309 PLMN 100

Description & Data Format:

Each PLMN number is composed of two fields:
MMC-Mobile Country Code
MNC-Mobile Network Code
It will be stored in the configuration memory together with its priority as a single
parameter in the following way:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 82 of 237

Priority PLMN (MCC-MNC)

Bit 23 Bit 20 Bit 19 Bit 1 Bit 0

The highest number in Priority field (15) is representing the most preferred network.
The value of 1 is the lowest priority, 2 - higher priority and so on.
The value of zero is representing Forbidden PLMN.
NOTE: The network available in the air, but not listed in the pre-programmed PLMN list
will be treated as per configuration in Consider Unknown Operators As Forbidden above.
During searching of available networks (processing AT+COPS command) the modem is
busy and not available for any type of communication. This process might take up to 3
minutes, but in majority of the cases will be accomplished in less than 20 seconds.
In case no available network found during search, or all the available networks are
forbidden the unit will hold and proceed with searching after expiration of Timer of
Auto Search.
Default value: zeroes

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 83 of 237

6.2.12.5 Operator Selection Flow Chart

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 84 of 237

Normal operation

Timer of available operator re- GSM Modem Wake up

search expired (after hibernation /reset
/AHR)

Yes Is Home
Connect to home network
network available?

Search for available networks

until at least one network is found

Is one (or
more) No
operators
forbidden /
Connect to the most No suspended?
Yes Is one (or
preferred operator more) operator
in the preferred
list? Yes

Yes Are there

not- No
Connect to the first unforbidden /
unsuspended operator in the list forbidden
/
suspende

Wait till successful

registration
Is 1348 bit5
=1 ("consider
unknown
operators as
forbidden") Yes
Is it 3rd failure Is the
No to connect to
No active
the same operator =
operator? required
operator?

No
Yes
Yes
Mark the same operator as Let the modem select the
suspended (until "Proceed to operator
normal operation")

Restart timer of available

operator re-search

Proceed with normal

operation

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 85 of 237

6.2.13 GSM Jamming Detection & Reaction (Not Supported by 3G units)

The GSM Jamming detection supports two modes of operation:

Legacy Jamming Detection mode: Jamming is detected without any relation to the
Ignition state of the vehicle. In this operational mode, jamming detection can activate
up to two outputs for jamming driver feedback. The Jamming feedback is released by
OTA command or Ignition Sequence.
Jamming Outputs Release by OTA Send OTA Event
Command No
Jamming Output Release by Ignition Jamming Jamming Outputs
Activation Configuratin
2426-2433

Jamming Out1
Jamming
Modem Output
Detection Send OTA Event
Activation Out2

Advanced Jamming Detection mode: The jamming detection is depended on the

vehicles ignition state. Different outputs activations are allocated for Ignition On and
Ignition Off states. Each Ignition state can drive up to two driver feedback outputs.
Jamming Driver feedback outputs are released when jamming condition ends. The
user can terminate the jamming state by the legacy sources (OTA commands and
Ignition sequence). In the advanced mode, the user can configure the jamming
detection time filter and the Jamming End condition time filter. Jamming events will
be sent when jamming is detected or when jamming ends. The Jamming events will
also reflect the vehicles ignition state. The Ignition on jamming output activation
configuration is the same configuration array used by the legacy jamming outputs
activation.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 86 of 237

Ignition On
Send OTA Event Parameters
No (Legacy Params)
Jamming 2426-2433
Ignition On Out1
Jamming
Send OTA Event Output
Out2
(Ignition On) Activation
Jamming
Modem Send OTA Event
Detection (Ignition OFF)
Ignition Off
Jamming Out1
Output
activation Out2
PL
Jamming Ignition Off
Criteria Parameters
(213) (New Parameters)
205-212

The following responses to jamming detection are available and switchable by unit's
programming:

The unit allows activating a vehicle horn and / or blinkers in pre-programmed

frequency and cadence.

Each of the outputs (horn and blinkers) is equipped by independent activation time
filter.

The unit allows activating nested immobilization (after vehicle's stop) and / or
immediate immobilization.

Unconditionally the unit stores dedicated event for jamming detection into its non-
volatile memory.

The unit enables releasing activated outputs by valid Dallas or by certain activity of
Ignition input.

6.2.13.1 GSM Jamming Detection

6.2.5.1.1 Telit
The cellular modem detects jamming and, if not during an active GPRS session, initiates
periodical reports to a microcontroller while jammed (every 3 seconds).
The jamming status is considered as GSM JAMMED upon reception of 3 consecutive
jamming detection notifications from the modem in 10 seconds. The unit stores a GSM
JAMMED event (TR206, TR Specific data 0) upon jamming status changing to Jammed.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 87 of 237

The jamming status is considered as GSM NOT JAMMED upon reception of a dedicated
unsolicited message from the modem - "Operative". The unit stores a GSM JAMMED event
(TR206, TR Specific data 1) upon jamming status change to Not Jammed.
Since during an active GPRS session unsolicited Jamming detection indications are not
received, the microcontroller is temporary suspending GPRS session upon traffic jam
(missing ACKs for at least 30 seconds and 3 lost ACKs minimum).
NOTE: In this case (GSM Jamming during GPRS Session) the Acknowledge Timeout
directly affects time to Jamming Detection.
The unit will not suspend the GPRS session more than once; next session suspend can
only happen in a subsequent GPRS session.

6.2.5.1.2 Cinterion
The Cinterion modem, unlike Telit, is not limited by active GPRS sessions the jamming
indications are issued in any state. The modem is not initiating any periodical report; it is
reporting GSM jamming state change upon jamming start and end. The unit is
immediately entering or leaving "Jamming" mode upon reception of the appropriate
notification from the modem.

6.2.13.2 Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Mode

Address: 525, bit 6

Description: The Advanced Jamming detection mode differentiates between Ignition-On
and Ignition-Off jamming detection criteria. Each mode (Ignition On or Ignition Off) has
its dedicated outputs activation configuration parameters. The Advanced Jamming also
enables the configuration of the jamming detection threshold and the Jamming End
filter delay. OTA events reflecting the beginning and End of jamming sessions will be sent
whenever jamming is detected or jamming stops. 0-Legacy Jamming support (not
depended on Ignition state), 1-Advanced Jamming support, Ignition state depended.
Default value: zero (Disabled)

6.2.13.3 Disable GSM Jamming Event or Disable GSM Jamming Event during
Ignition On

Address: 1348, bit 3

Description: This configuration parameter disables jamming OTA events. The
functionality of this configuration bit depends on the state of the Jamming detection mode
(See: Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Mode): If the advanced mode is configured, This
configuration bit will only disable jamming events started during Ignition On, If the
Advanced mode is not configured, this pin will disable all jamming events.
Note that Jamming detection started during Ignition On and ended while in Ignition Off
will be reported even if Disable GSM Jamming Event during Ignition off is enabled.
In addition, output activation as a reaction to jamming is independent from registration of
GSM JAMMED event.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 88 of 237

Default value: zero (Jamming is NOT disabled)

6.2.13.4 GSM Jamming-End Time Filter

Address: 214
Description: The GSM Jamming-End Time Filter is only applicable if advanced jamming
mode is enabled (See: Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Mode). The Jamming-End Time
Filter defines the time required for declaring End of Jamming event. End of jamming will
send a jamming end event and deactivate the associated outputs if configured by
Release by Jamming End flag. Setting the Jamming End Time Filter to 0 will result in
immediate outputs deactivation. The filter is common for both Ignition-on and Ignition-off
jamming states. The timer resolution is 15 seconds.
Default value: 10 Minutes
Resolution: 15 second

6.2.13.5 GSM Jamming Detection Time Filter

Address: 213
Description: The GSM Jamming-End Time Filter is only applicable if advanced jamming
mode is enabled (See: Advanced GSM Jamming Detection Mode). The Jamming detection
Time Filter defines the basic criteria for declaring jamming condition. The time filter
defines the minimal number of consecutive 3 seconds samples needed before jamming
condition is detected. Each bit represents time delay of 3 seconds. The minimal value is 1
(0 will be translated to 1 by the Firmware). Typically this parameter will be set to 10,
representing 30 Seconds time filter.
Default value: 30 Seconds (10)
Resolution: 3 second

6.2.13.6 Output Activation as a reaction to GSM Jamming Detection

Upon GSM jamming detection and expiration of activation timeouts, the unit can
concurrently activate two outputs. Once activated by Jamming Detection logic, the output
can only be deactivated by:

A command (OTA or serial)

Authorized Dallas

Ignition activity pattern

Once deactivated by user or by command the output will be activated again only upon the
next jamming detection. In other words: after the end of the active jamming session and
beginning of the next one.
NOTE: Reset does not deactivate an output activated upon jamming detection.

6.2.5.7.1 Output, Auto-Activated upon Jamming Detection

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 89 of 237

Address: 2426 for first output and 2429 for second output, bits 0-2
Address: 205 for first output and 208 for second output, bits 0-2
Description: This pair of parameters defines a numbers of outputs that will be activated
upon jamming detection.

Output name Output number

Feature Disabled 0

Siren 1

Gradual Stop 2

St. Immobilizer 3

LED 4

Blinkers 5

Reserved 6

Reserved 7

Value span: 1 to 5
Default value: zero

6.2.5.7.2 Delay for Output Activation

Address: 2432 for first output and 2433 for second output
Address: 211 for first output and 212 for second output
Description: This pair of parameters contain a time filters for output activation upon
GSM Jamming.
The event of Jamming detection will still be generated w/o any timeout.
If this parameter contains any number, different from zero, the output will not be
activated immediately upon Jamming detection, but after a pre-programmed timer. An
activation of the output will only occur if upon expiration of this timer a jamming session
is still active.
The timer for output activation will start upon detection of GSM Jamming and reset upon
detection of GSM Jamming end.
Resolution: 15 seconds / bit, maximum 63.75 minutes
Default value: zero (immediate activation upon Jamming detection)

6.2.5.7.3 Output Activation Pattern (Upon Jamming Detection)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 90 of 237

Address: 2426 for first output and 2429 for second output, bits 3-5
Address: 205 for first output and 208 for second output, bits 3-5 (Advanced Mode during
Ignition-Off)
Description: This pair of parameters defines a activation pattern of outputs upon
jamming detection.

Setting Action

0 Pulse Activation (The output shall be activated for the time, defined in
"Pulse Outputs Width Period", addr. 140 dec

1 Change state to active upon jamming detection, change to inactive

upon release (by command, Dallas or Ignition Activity)

2 Activate Gradually (only compatible with Gradual Stop output)

3 Activate Nested (executed upon jamming detection only after vehicle

stops, e.g. Ignition off or 10 valid GPS packets showing speed lower than
1 km/h)

4 Template Activation (according to the settings described below)

5-7 Reserved

6.2.13.7 Template of Output Activation upon Jamming Detection

Example of template:
Two activations in a session, 1 second per activation, 2 sessions, 3 seconds between
sessions:

6.2.5.7.1 GSM Jamming - Output Activation Template - Activation Length

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 91 of 237

Address: 2427 for first output and 2430 for second output, bits 0-3
Address: 206 for first output and 209 for second output, bits 0-3 (Advanced Mode,
During Ignition-Off)
Description: This pair of parameters defines a length of activation of the selected output
upon GSM Jamming detection.
0 for the time, defined in "Pulse Outputs Width Period", addr. 140 dec
Value resolution: 0.5 second
Default value: zero

6.2.5.7.2 GSM Jamming - Output Activation Template - Number of Activations in a

Session

Address: 2427 for first output and 2430 for second output, bits 4-7
Address: 206 for first output and 209 for second output, bits 0-3 (Advanced Mode,
During Ignition-Off)
Description: This pair of parameters defines a number of activations of the selected
output upon GSM Jamming detection.
0 cancels outputs activation upon jamming detection
Default value: zero

6.2.5.7.3 GSM Jamming - Output Activation Template - Number of Activation Sessions

Address: 2428 for first output and 2431 for second output, bits 0-3
Address: 207 for first output and 210 for second output, bits 0-3 (Advanced Mode,
During Ignition-Off)
Description: This pair of parameters defines a number of sessions of output activations
upon GSM Jamming detection.
0 for cyclic activation all the time of jamming
Default value: zero

6.2.5.7.4 GSM Jamming - Output Activation Template - Time between the Activation
Sessions

Address: 2428 for first output and 2431 for second output, bits 4-7
Address: 207 for first output and 210 for second output, bits 4-7 (Advanced Mode,
During Ignition-Off)
Description: This pair of parameters defines a time between activation sessions of
output activations upon GSM Jamming detection.
Zero value: If zero is programmed the unit will only perform one session of activation
irrespectively to the programmed number of sessions.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 92 of 237

Value resolution: 0.5 second

Default value: zero

6.2.13.8 GSM Jamming Outputs Release

GSM jamming outputs can be released by Dallas key authentication or by Ignition
sequence. When advanced jamming mode is enabled (See: Advanced GSM Jamming
Detection Mode), It is possible also to release the outputs when GSM jamming condition
ends.

6.2.17.8.1 Enable Output Release by GSM Jamming End condition while in Ignition-On

Address: 522, bit 5

Description: GSM Jamming-end detection will deactivate the outputs if this parameter is
enabled. The Jamming-End state is declared after no jamming detection is detected for
the time defined in GSM Jamming End Filter:
0 - Jamming-End doesnt affect the activation outputs.
1 - Jamming-End will deactivate the GSM Jamming activation outputs.
This bit is applicable for jamming end condition detected while the unit was in Ignition-
On.
Values span: 0- Disable, 1 - Enable
Default value: Enable

6.2.17.8.2 Enable Output Release by GSM Jamming End condition while in Ignition-Off

Address: 522, bit 4

Description: GSM Jamming-end detection will deactivate the outputs if this parameter is
enabled. The Jamming-End state is declared after no jamming detection is detected for
the time defined in GSM Jamming End Filter:
0 - Jamming-End doesnt affect the activation outputs.
1 - Jamming-End will deactivate the GSM Jamming activation outputs.
This bit is applicable for jamming end condition detected while the unit was in Ignition-
Off.
Values span: 0- Disable, 1 - Enable
Default value: Enable

6.2.17.8.3 Enable Output Release by Authorized Dallas

Address: 522, bit 7

Description: This bit enables deactivation of an output, activated by Jamming Detection
Logic, by an authorized Dallas key

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 93 of 237

Values span: 0 - Disable, 1 - Enable

Default value: zero

6.2.17.8.4 Enable Output Release by Ignition Activity

Address: 522, bit 6

Description: This bit enables deactivation of an output, activated by Jamming Detection
Logic, by the below specified sequence on Ignition line:
1. From ignition off state Switch Ignition on for a period between 0.5 to 2 seconds
(Ignore input change time filter)
Switch it back off for a period between 0.5 to 2 seconds (Ignore input change time filter)
Repeat 1 and 2 four times.
Upon detection of deactivation activity on Ignition the unit will:

Activate feedback "beep" (using feedback output/s)

Release an output
Values span: 0 - Disable, 1 - Enable
Default value: zero

6.2.14 Other Configuration Parameters related to Communication Settings

6.2.14.1 Disable Active Transmissions

Address: 6 bit 1
Description: If set to 1 the unit will not actively initiate any kind of connection - SMS,
GPRS or voice. It will reply to incoming SMS commands, if the relevant flags for the
current roaming/homing state are enabled.
Default: 0 Enable Active Transmissions

6.2.14.2 Enable Command Authentication

Address: 1 bit 6
Description: If this feature is enabled authentication of every incoming message to the
unit (like command or acknowledge) will be verified. Each incoming message should
include a unique code, generated as a function of two variables:

Units ID

8 bytes Auth Table, stored in non-volatile memory of the unit and concurrently in the
Communication Center application.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 94 of 237

If the code will not be verified as authentic the unit will not perform / acknowledge the
command and will erase it.
The unit supports dedicated Auth Table read/write commands over its wire protocol. See
description of the commands in a corresponding documentation.
The OTA Auth. table modification will be only be accepted by the unit if the Command
Authentication feature is DISABLED.
Default: 0 Disabled

6.2.14.3 Enable Driver's Privacy (Invisible) Mode

Address: 6 bit 4
Description:
NOTE: This mode is not supported by security variants.
This mode is designed to allow the driver to allow/disallow tracking of their vehicle. After
entering Privacy mode, the unit will generate only Ignition On/Ignition Off events, no
Time or Distance events will be generated. The unit will still reply to interrogations and
perform commands from the Control center, but outgoing messages will not include
position information.
If the unit enters Privacy mode during Ignition On, it will generate pair of events:
Ignition Off with position information and Ignition On without position information.
The purpose of event generation is to define stop of tracking session.
If the unit leaves Privacy mode during Ignition On, it will generate pair of events:
Ignition Off without position information and Ignition On with position information.
The purpose of event generation is to define start of tracking session.
In order to enter Privacy mode:

The mode should be enabled by this configuration bit.

All the plain and distress events as well as other functionality assigned to "Shock
input" should be disabled.

The Shock input should be triggered to enter Privacy mode and released to leave
this mode.
Default: 0 Disabled

6.2.14.4 Enable Private-Business Mode Toggling

Address 465, bit 2

Description: It is possible to enable usage of "Lock input" (pin 5) as a Private-Business

mode toggler. If this bit is enabled, every time the Lock input is triggered the unit
switches to the opposite mode (Private to Business and vice versa).
The default mode is Business.
The Private mode is finished upon:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 95 of 237

The active ID is erased from RAM after journey end.

Lock Input trigger.

During Private mode the unit is continually activating Gd. Stop (pin 17) output, which is
serving as Private state monitoring LED.
During Private mode the unit is continually set bit 5 of byte 11 in every outbound OTA
msg type 0. Upon entering Private mode the bit 5 of byte 11 is set BEFORE generation of
the input trigger event/distress.
Note: This feature is applicable for Cello-IQ + Car Sharing 2 units only. Cello-CANIQ units
doesn't support Private/Business toggling (since it's done by Lock input (5) which is
dedicated to CAN in Cello-CANIQ units). In Car Sharing 2 units, the toggling is done by
Shock input.
Data Range: 0 - Disable, 1 - Enable
Default: 0 - Disabled

6.2.14.5 Private-Business Mode Switch upon Trip End

Address 465, bit 3

Description: This parameter allow to manage the Private/Business automatic mode

switch to depend on trip end, rather than on Driver ID erase. According to legacy logics,
the automatic Private/Business mode change was fixed, and upon Driver ID erase the unit
switched to the default mode (Business). In some cases of Car Sharing 2 application, if
Private mode was activated, and no driver ID was introduced (and therefore erased), the
unit never switched back to the default mode (Business). In addition this parameter
allows to set a different default (not necessarily business) to switch back to upon trip end.
Notes:
This feature is applicable only if legacy "Enable Private-Business Mode Toggling"
parameter is set to Enable.
This feature is applicable for Cello-IQ + Car Sharing 2 units only. Cello-CANIQ units
doesn't support Private/Business toggling (since it's done by Lock input (5) which is
dedicated to CAN in Cello-CANIQ units). In Car Sharing 2 units, the toggling is done
by Shock input.

Data Range:

Enum Private/Business Mode

0 Business
1 Private
2 Keep Current Mode
3 Spare

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 96 of 237

Default: Business

6.2.14.6 HRLS (High Resolution Logging Session) - Number of Events

Address: 491
Any system trigger (Input trigger, GPS reading based trigger etc.) can be configured to
trigger a High Resolution Logging Session (HRLS - HRLS is one of 4 available event
generation types; refer to the Event Types generated by Cellocator devices section).
During this session the unit is logging an event every valid GPS fix (every second). If the
GPS fix is invalid during HRLS - the event will not be logged.
The duration of HRLS is limited by:

Pre-programmed number of logged events as programmed in this parameter.

A timeout, closing the HRLS even if not all the events programmed in Amount of
Events during HRLS are logged (in case of poor GPS coverage).
HRLS Timeout [sec] = [Amount of Events during HRLS] x 2
There is no data upload during the High Resolution Logging Session the events are
delivered after the end of HRLS.
Description: This parameter defines number of events, generated during High Resolution
Logging Session. Event is logged every second (if the GPS fix is valid), therefore the
parameter defines minimal duration of HRLS in seconds.
Events with invalid GPS fix will not be logged, and as a result the session could proceed
longer. Maximal duration of HRLS in seconds is twice bigger than the minimal one.
Value span: 0-255
Default value: 5

6.2.14.7 Number of Retries to Forward Data over UDP GPRS

Address: 283
Description: This parameter defines number of retries to forward data from the COM
port (for example from MDT) to the Central Control over UDP/IP. Such a message
requires acknowledge (msg type 4) from the Central Control. If the acknowledge will not
be received during the timeout defined by "Message Transit Acknowledge Timeout", the
unit will resend it number of times, defined in this parameter.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 97 of 237

If all the reties forwarding data through UDP will fail, the same message will be sent by
SMS (if enabled in bytes 202, 204, bit 5).
Default value: 5

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 98 of 237

6.2.15 GSM Detection

According to the usage experience, there are scenarios of pre-ordered car thefts. In this
scenario, the thief receives an order to steal a specific car. He then checks if this car is
equipped with a transmitting security unit by activating a GSM detector when the legal
owner starts the car at home and drives away. If he collects GSM transmissions (i.e. a
unit is installed in the car), when he later comes to steal it, he first uninstall the unit and
only then starting the car and takes it.

To avoid the thief of knowing if the car is equipped with a unit, the following logic was
developed: When the car is started (Ignition On), the unit functions according to its
regular logics besides the Modem which stays off (no matter what was the unit mode
before the Ignition On). The Modem is turned on after expiration of a timer, which is
measured from Ignition On filter expiration (but no Start event is transmitted). This timer
is configurable by "Modem On Delay Timer" parameter (address 230), when for zero
value the delay is disabled. All of the events (both logged and distress) that are
generated in the delay period are not transmitted. Logged events are logged in the unit
memory, and transmitted when the Modem is turned on. Distress events are kept for
their "life" time, if exists (legacy logics). If distress event life time expires before the
Modem On Delay Timer expires, the event is lost. If the car is turned off (Ignition Off)
again before this timer expires, the unit ignores the timer and act according to its regular
logics.

6.2.15.1 Modem On Delay Timer7

Address: 230
Description: This parameter determines the time to delay the Modem turn on from
Ignition On. Zero - disables the Modem turn on delay.
Value: 0-127 Minutes, 0.5 minute/bit
Default: 0 - disabled

7
Available only for CR300B (New Platform) from FW version 43m and later, and for CR300B
(Legacy) from FW version 43h and later.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 99 of 237

6.3 GPS Calibration

6.3.1 Base Unit (Measurement Factor of GPS Odometer)

Address: 80 to 83
Description: The value defines unit used for distance and odometer measurements. The
selected value (for example 100m, 1km or 1 mile) will be used by the unit as a lowest
distance unit to be reported and as a distance resolution.
The parameter is a 32-bit unsigned integer. Value is represented in centimeters. (100000
for 1 Km).
Valid values: Any non-zero value
Default Value: 100000

6.3.2 GPS Odometer Current Value

Address: 76 to 79
Description: This parameter stores the current reading of the vehicle odometer, in
base units (see previous parameter). Normally this value is programmed upon
installation (synchronization with vehicle odometer) and then maintained by the unit
itself.
NOTES:

This parameter does not require reset to be implemented.

Upon 'Ignition OFF' ('Stop Event time filter' elapsed), the unit will update the PL ('GPS
odometers current value') with the odometer value reported OTA (same as the value
serially found in 'Master Unit Status Request'), regardless of the 'GPS odometers
current value' in PL.

Having the 'GPS odometers current value' serially programmed requires Power
recycle in order to take effect.

OTA update of 'GPS odometers current value' will take effect immediately.

Upon new FW boot due to any type of FW upgrade (serial, OTA, 'Cellocator+' etc.),
the unit will take the odometer value stored in PL, which is true for the last 'Stop
Report'.
This note is more relevant for those users, upgrading while vehicle is traveling (after
FW upgrade, odometer skip back to the last 'Stop Report' value can be observed).
Data format: The parameter is a 32-bit integer
Value span: 00000000h to FFFFFFFFh
Default value: 00000000h

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 100 of 237

6.3.3 Enable IMEI Transmission via Type 0 Message

Address: 1347 bit 4
Description: Enabling IMEI transmission will transmit the modems IMEI (up to 15 digits
decimal number or 50 bits) on each outbound type 0 message. Type 0 bytes 33-38 and
byte 41 bits 5 and 6 will carry the IMEI number as explained in the wireless
communication protocol under section 2.2.3.4, IMEA transmission. This feature was first
introduced as CR200 feature.
Default: Disabled (0)

6.3.4 Enable GPS Navigation Start-Stop updates

Address: 99, bit 0 for plain event
102, bit 0 for distress
Description: If this bit is set (1) the unit will generate an event/distress upon every GPS
reading validity status change.
Default: Both disabled (0)

6.3.5 GPS Navigation Start/Stop filter

Address: 500
Description: This parameter defines number of invalid GPS packets, required for
declaring a "GPS Navigation End"; it is also defines number of valid GPS packets required
to declare "GPS Navigation Start".
Note that the GPS validity is automatically declared as "invalid" upon wake up or after
reset.
Data format: The parameter is a 8-bits integer
Value span: 0-255 (value of zero cancels the filter)
Default value: 0Ah (10 seconds)

6.3.6 Enable Tight GPS PMODE Filter

Address: 509, bit 7
Description: If this flag is enabled, the unit will consider GPS data as valid only when
PMODE1=3 (in GPS Data, refer to the Cellocator Wireless protocol) or 4 and PMODE2=2.
Otherwise any of the following values of PMODE1:2,3,4,5 or 6 will be accepted as a valid
fix.
Values:

0 Requires 2PMODE16 values to deem position as "Correct".

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 101 of 237

1 Requires PMODE1 equal to 3-4 values and PMODE2=2 to deem position as

"Correct".

First acquisition:
In order to speed up the GPS acquisition:
1. Upon initial boot (power up, excluding AHR) the GPS validity test will start according
to "Normal GPS PMODE Filter", irrespective of the setting in this parameter AND w/o
DOP validation.
This simplified validation routine will work until the first acquisition compatible with
"Tide GPS PMODE Filter" setting AND with DOP setting.
2. Upon achieving acquisition compatible with "Tide GPS PMODE Filter" the unit will start
behaving according to the setting in this parameter AND with DOP setting as usual.
Data format: The parameter is a flags bitmap, 1 - Enable, 0 Disable
Value span: any 8-bit value, four upper bits are currently a dont-care bits
Default value: 1

6.3.7 GPS DOP Threshold

Address: 1625
Description: Dilution of Precision (DOP) is a measure of how the geometry of the
satellites affects the current solutions accuracy. This message provides a method to
restrict use of GPS solutions when the DOP is too high.
This is actually an additional GPS solution validation tool: the GPS packets with an HDOP
higher than the value in this parameter are marked as invalid.
Data format: unsigned 8 bits integer
Default value: 8

6.3.8 Velocity Threshold for HIGH SPEED Mode

Address: 455
Description: The unit can be configured to decrease frequency of Time and Distance
events on high speeds automatically. The speed threshold considered as "high speed" is
programmed into this parameter.
This parameter is used by Time based alert Period Multiplier for HIGH SPEED mode
(Address 92 and 35, bits 4 to 7) and by Distance Event Period Multiplier for HIGH SPEED
mode (Address 92 and 35, bits 0 to 3) parameters to define from what speed the number of
the events should be decreased.
Note, that the in order to switch the operational mode of the unit from "Low Speed
Mode" to "High Speed Mode" the system speed must raise 3km/h above the programmed
speed. Same way, in order to switch the operational mode of the unit from "High Speed

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 102 of 237

Mode" to "Low Speed Mode" the system speed must fall 3km/h below the programmed
speed.
Data format: 8-bit unsigned, units [cm/sec]
Default value: 60 k/h

6.3.9 GPS Maintenance Updates

6.3.9.1 Enable GPS Navigation Start-Stop Updates

Address: 99, bit 0 for plain event

102, bit 0 for distress
Description: If this bit is set (1) the unit will generate an event/distress upon every GPS
reading validity status change. (Refer to wireless protocol for GPS signal validity
definition)
The validity status changes after 10 consecutive GPS frames with the same validity
status, different from the current one.
Default: Both disabled (0)

6.3.9.2 Enable Update per GPS Auto Factory Reset Updates

Address: 496, bit 1 for plain event

497, bit 1 for distress
Description: If enabled, the unit will create an event or/and distress per GPS Factory
reset. Obviously the GPS Factory reset has to be enabled. See below description of GPS
Factory reset.
Default value: Both 0 (disabled)

6.3.9.3 Enable GPS Disconnection Updates

Address: 496, bit 0 for plain event

497, bit 0 for distress
Description: If enabled, the unit will generate an event or/and distress of GPS
Disconnection upon detection of 10 sequential missing packets from GPS.
The first received packet from GPS will cause the unit to generate GPS connection alert.
Default value: Both 0 (disabled)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 103 of 237

6.3.10 GPS Odometer Management

6.3.10.1 Enable Speed x Time Calculation (SxT)

Address: 509, bit 0

Description: As a default, the unit queries the GPS every second. If that flag is enabled,
the unit multiplies the speed at a specific location by 1 second, the result being the
distance traveled during this second.
Speed (m/s) x 1 sec = elapsed distance (m)
Whenever the unit does not receive new GPS data for time, defined in Max Time between
GPS readings for SxT calculation it will not use the regular calculating algorithm. Instead,
it will ignore the time during which no reception was available and will restart calculating
the elapsed distance immediately when satellite reception reappears.
If both Pythagoras and SxT calculation are enabled, the unit will use SxT when there is a
valid GPS fix and Pythagoras when there is no GPS coverage.
Default: 1 - enabled

6.3.10.2 Enable Pythagoras Calculation

Address: 509, bit 1

Description: If this flag is enabled the unit will calculate the distance between 2
consistent GPS queries according to the Pythagoras theorem:
Distance = ()2 + ()2 + ()2
If both Pythagoras and SxT calculation are enabled, the unit will use SxT when there is a
valid GPS fix and Pythagoras when there is no GPS coverage (from last GPS fix to the
next GPS fix).
Default: 1 - enabled

6.3.10.3 Reset Last Known Location on Ignition Off

Address: 509, bit 2

Description: Relevant for Pythagoras and combined Pythagoras + SxT calculation. If
that flag is set (logical 1) the unit will dismiss the last detected location per detection of
Ignition off. For future calculation will be used the first GPS fix obtained after Ignition On.
In other words the unit will ignore the distance, passed by the vehicle during Ignition Off
mode. The feature is useful in case when the vehicle is being towed from one place to
another.
Note that in this case the vehicle will also ignore the distance, passed from Ignition On to
first GPS fix obtained.
Default: 0 - disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 104 of 237

6.3.10.4 Max Time between GPS Readings for SxT Calculation

Address: 84
Description: This parameter stores the maximal time between two valid readings from
GPS (in seconds) to be qualified for SxT odometer accumulation.
When you make a configuration take into a consideration the following rule:

where:
max speed in km/h maximum speed that the vehicle get during the normal usage.
Recommended 160km/h.
max time apart is a value programmed in this parameter.
base unit is Base unit (measurement factor of GPS odometer), address 80-83.
Data format: The parameter is a 8-bit integer.
Value span: 1 to 255
Default value: 7

6.3.11 GPS Reset Settings

6.3.11.1 Enable GPS Auto Factory Reset

Address: 497, bit 7

Description: If this bit is set, the unit will trigger a Factory Reset of the GPS in the
following cases:

The GPS communicates, but service fields MODE1 and MODE2 are equal to 0 and 16
respectively for 10 minutes.

The GPS is communicating, but the data is considered as not navigating and the
service fields MODE1 and MODE2 are not equal to 0 and 16 respectively for 15
minutes. In this case the unit is resetting GPS using On/Off line. If the condition is
true for another 15 minutes the unit will send factory reset command to GPS
(effectively the factory reset is sent once in 30 minutes).
Default value: 0

6.3.11.2 GPS Reset Upon Ignition Off

Address: 6, bit 2 when GPS is navigating

6, bit 3 when GPS is NOT navigating

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 105 of 237

Description: As with any ARM based module, the GPS has to be reset from time to time.
If one of hibernation modes is used, the GPS is reset upon entrance to hibernation.
But if the hibernation in not used the safest way to reset the GPS periodically is upon
Ignition change to Off state. There is an advantage of doing such a maintenance reset
when the GPS is navigating, because such a worm reset enables the shortest recovery
time. It is also possible to do it only when the GPS is not navigating anyway, but in this
case (for example on underground parking) the recovery might be longer.
Default values: bit 2 0 (disabled), bit 3 1 (enabled GPS reset upon ignition off when
the GPS is not navigating)

6.3.11.3 GPS AHR (Auto Hardware Reset) except in CelloTrack Nano

When the unit identifies 3 consecutive GPS communication errors, the unit will attempt to
Auto Hardware Reset (AHR) its GPS up to programmable number of retries (according to
Maximum Number of AHR parameter used also for Modem AHR, 5 by default).
The unit will create a dedicated event per each GPS AHR TR 200, STR 2 (if enabled by
Enable AHR Reporting parameter).

6.4 Inputs & Outputs

6.4.1 Discrete Inputs Triggering Time Filters

These two bytes defines the inputs Additional Time Filters. The Additional Time Filter will
extend the inputs filtering capabilities separately for logical Raising and logical Falling.
The total filter is constructed from Common Discrete Inputs Time Filter (same for all
inputs and all states) and dedicated filter for each state change (Raising/Falling) of each
input.
It is possible to define asymmetric triggering delays for logical Raising and logical Falling
for each one of system's discrete inputs.
The Additional Time Filter supports multiple resolutions from seconds to hours.

Logical Status Input's Input Input's Input

of discrete status Raising status Falling
input changes OTA changes event
to High event to Low

Common Additional Common Additional

Discrete Inputs Begin Discrete Inputs End Time
Time Filter Time Time Filter Filter
Filter

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 106 of 237

6.4.1.1 Common Discrete Inputs Time Filter

Address: 136
Description: This parameter is aimed to protect units discrete input from noise influence
and defines time, from inputs level change to change detection.
Data format: 8-bit unsigned, Resolution 10 msec.
Value span: 00h to FFh
Default value: d10

6.4.1.2 Additional Begin Time Filter Resolution

Address: bits 6 and 7

Door /
CelloTrack T, GP1 1357
Shock /
CelloTrack T, GP2 1359
Distress 1361
Unlock 1363
Lock 1365
Ignition 1367

Description: This parameter defines resolution of the additional time filter applied in
addition to Common Filter before discrete input raising alert is generated.

Value Resolution Maximum possible value of

the filter

0 1 sec 63 sec

1 30 sec 31.5 min

2 5 min 5.25 hours

3 1 hour 63 hours

Default value: 0 resolution of 1 second

6.4.1.3 Additional Begin Time Filter value

Address: bits 0-5

Door /

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 107 of 237

CelloTrack T, GP1 1357

Shock /
CelloTrack T, GP2 1359
Distress 1361
Unlock 1363
Lock 1365
Ignition 1367

Description: This parameter stores a value of the additional time filter applied in addition
to Common Filter before discrete input raising alert is generated. The resolution of the
value is configured in previous parameter (1 second to 1 hour).
Default value: 0 additional filter disabled

6.4.1.4 Additional End Time Filter Resolution

Address: bits 6 and 7

Door /
CelloTrack T, GP1 1358
Shock /
CelloTrack T, GP2 1360
Distress 1362
Unlock 1364
Lock 1366
Ignition 1368

Description: This parameter defines resolution of the additional time filter applied in
addition to Common Filter after discrete input raising alert is generated.

Value Resolution Maximum possible value of

the filter

0 1 sec 63 sec

1 30 sec 31.5 min

2 5 min 5.25 hours

3 1 hour 63 hours

Default value: 0 resolution of 1 second

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 108 of 237

6.4.1.5 Additional End Time Filter value

Address: bits 0-5

Door /
CelloTrack T, GP1 1358
Shock /
CelloTrack T, GP2 1360
Distress 1362
Unlock 1364
Lock 1366
Ignition 1368

Description: This parameter stores a value of the additional time filter applied in addition
to Common Filter after discrete input raising alert is generated. The resolution of the
value is configured in previous parameter (1 second to 1 hour).
Default value: 0 additional filter disabled

6.4.2 Analog Measurement Averaging Time

Address: 466
Name in Programmer: Power Sources Measurement Time filter
Description: This parameter is aimed to protect analog measurement from noise
influence and defines averaging time. The reported value will be therefore an average
voltage for the period defined in this parameter. (The sampling rate is every 10msec).
Data format: 8-bit unsigned, resolution 0.1 second
Value span: 0-25.5 seconds
Default value: 1 second

6.4.3 Inputs in OTA Message

Address: 0, bit 3
Presentation of inputs in wireless Cellocator protocol

0 Legacy mode, inputs are presented in their raw (unprocessed) form.

1 Inputs are presented in their processed, logical form (inverted and

filtered).

Default value: 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 109 of 237

6.4.4 Enable Monitoring Logical Status of Ignition in OTA Packets

Address: 1349, bit 0

Description: If this bit is enabled (1) the ignition bit in all any outbound messages (OTA
and serial) will reflect logical status of Ignition (i.e. after the Ignition Filter)
Default value: 0 - Disable Logical

6.4.5 Enable Warning Output Activation during Gradual Immobilization

Address: 0, bit 5
Description: If enabled, a "blinkers" output (pin 18) will be activated when Gradual Stop
output is gradually or immediately activated (to notify surrounding driver that the vehicle
is going to blame and stop shortly).
Default value: 0 - Disable warning output activation

6.4.6 Outputs Pulse Width Period

Address: 140
Description: This parameter defines the activation duration time for pulse outputs (for
example some system feedbacks like Driver Authorization and others).
Data format: 8-bit unsigned, resolution is 100 mSec
Default value: 10 (1 second)

6.4.7 LED Management

Address: 7, bit 4
Description: This flag enables LED monitoring, which is different in Fleet and Security
modifications of Cellocator units.
In fleet firmware modifications a sophisticated blinking pattern, monitoring GPS and GSM
status is provided, in a Security modification the LED monitors a security state of the
system.
In Car Sharing systems this bit also control the Proximity Reader LED
In Fleet Modification:
The blinking pattern is constructed from cycles of 2 blinking zones each, which will be
repeated by unit continually. The first zone will represent the functionality of GSM, the
second zone GPS.
Each zone will last 3 seconds with 1 second of LED off interval between them.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 110 of 237

On
GSM GPS GSM GPS
Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring
zone zone zone zone
Off
t
3 sec 1 sec 3 sec 5 sec

5 seconds LED Off interval will separate between each cycle.

IMPORTANT: During the voice call, the LED will continually glow from the
moment of voice call trigger to the moment of voice call hang up.
The cycles of two blinking zones will be restored after the end of the voice call.
GSM Monitoring Zone definition

Status Blinking pattern

GSM off off

Not registered to GSM / No 200mse

c
SIM

3 seconds

Registered in Home GSM

0.5s
network
(not attached to GPRS) 3 seconds

Registered in Roaming GSM

network
(not attached to GPRS) 0.5s 0.5s

3 seconds

Attached to GPRS/home
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s

3 seconds

Attached to GPRS/roaming
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s

3 seconds

GPS Monitoring Zone definition

Status Blinking pattern

GPS off off

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 111 of 237

Status Blinking pattern

GPS is unplugged / faulty 200mse

3 seconds

GPS communicating, but not

0.5s
navigating
3 seconds

GPS is in navigation mode

0.5s 0.5s

3 seconds

GPS is in GYRO mode (only

0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
for compatible models)

3 seconds

In Security modification
1 second on/1 second off Alarm Armed
On - Silent delay
Slow Blinking Passive Arming
Off Standby
Rapid blinking Alarm Triggered

Default value (Fleet and Security): 0 - LED Management Enable;

In CarSharing - Old

LED Management Disable bit if this bit is enabled, the monitoring LED will behave in the
following manner:

Glow during voice session

Ignition On:
0.5 second on and 2 seconds off while there is no GSM registration.
Off - when GSM registered.

Ignition Off:
Backwards compatible mode
1 second on and 2 seconds off when reserved (for example, when there
is a Dallas ID other than zero in the low 17 slots of the Dallas ID array).

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 112 of 237

Off - Ready for reservation.

Enhanced mode
1 second on and 2 seconds off when reserved (for example, when there
is a Dallas ID other than zero in the low 30 slots of the Dallas ID array).
Off - Ready for reservation.
Default value: LED disabled (1)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 113 of 237

6.4.8 Analog (& Frequency) Inputs in OTA Message

Note that frequency counters are supported from FW30a.

6.4.8.1 Bytes 26-29 of OTA Message 0

Address: 1620 1621 1622 1623

Byte of OTA 26 27 28 29
Message 0

Description: The OTA protocol provides 4 bytes dedicated for monitoring of analog
inputs in few different message types. Those bytes can contain measurement from the
different fields as per the configuration below.
Obviously if the selected source of Data is an Analog input, the corresponding input shall
be programmed as an analog input in Input's Configuration.

Pin Number/Field Name Number to be Remarks

programmed

Non 0

Pin 14 / 1
Door

Pin 15 / Shock 2 Default for byte 29 of OTA

Message
0

Pin 16 / Panic 3

Pin 11/ Unlock 4

Pin 5 / Lock 5

Battery voltage (V bat) 6 Default for byte 27 of OTA

Message
0

Battery temperature (NTC), 7 Default for byte 28 of OTA

default for byte 3 Message 0.
Note: In CelloTrack T Power,
It is mandatory to select
NTC in one of the OTA bytes
(26-28) in order to enable
the charging function.

Regulated voltage 8

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 114 of 237

Pin Number/Field Name Number to be Remarks

programmed

Input voltage 9 Default for byte 26 of OTA

Message 0

CFE In 1 10

CFE In 2 11

CFE In 3 12

CFE In 4 13

CFE In 5 14

CFE In 6 15

First oneWire Temperature 16 Signed value ranging from

Sensor -55 to 125 Celsius

Second oneWire 17
Temperature Sensor

Third oneWire Temperature 18

Sensor

Forth oneWire Temperature 19

Sensor

RSSI 20

RPM 21 Taken from analog frequency

input or from CAN (depends
on CAN Application Control
parameter address 4102,
bit 3).

6.4.9 Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset

6.4.9.1 Disable Continuous Gradual Stop Activation after SW Reset

Address: 501, bit 0
Description: In legacy implementation all outputs states are kept by the unit before SW
reset (e.g. upon PL upgrading), and an output which was active before the reset will be
activated again after the reset. This parameter allows to disable this feature. If disabled,
the output will not be activated after SW reset even if it was active before the reset.
Data Range: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation); 1 - Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 115 of 237

Default Value: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy

implementation)

6.4.9.2 Disable Continuous Siren Activation after SW Reset

Address: 501, bit 1
Description: In legacy implementation all outputs states are kept by the unit before SW
reset (e.g. upon PL upgrading), and an output which was active before the reset will be
activated again after the reset. This parameter allows to disable this feature. If disabled,
the output will not be activated after SW reset even if it was active before the reset.
Data Range: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation); 1 - Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset
Default Value: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation)

6.4.9.3 Disable Continuous St. Immobilizer Activation after SW Reset

Address: 501, bit 3
Description: In legacy implementation all outputs states are kept by the unit before SW
reset (e.g. upon PL upgrading), and an output which was active before the reset will be
activated again after the reset. This parameter allows to disable this feature. If disabled,
the output will not be activated after SW reset even if it was active before the reset.
Data Range: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation); 1 - Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset
Default Value: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation)

6.4.9.4 Disable Continuous LED Activation after SW Reset

Address: 501, bit 4
Description: In legacy implementation all outputs states are kept by the unit before SW
reset (e.g. upon PL upgrading), and an output which was active before the reset will be
activated again after the reset. This parameter allows to disable this feature. If disabled,
the output will not be activated after SW reset even if it was active before the reset.
Data Range: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation); 1 - Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset
Default Value: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation)

6.4.9.5 Disable Continuous Blinkers Activation after SW Reset

Address: 501, bit 5
Description: In legacy implementation all outputs states are kept by the unit before SW
reset (e.g. upon PL upgrading), and an output which was active before the reset will be

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 116 of 237

activated again after the reset. This parameter allows to disable this feature. If disabled,
the output will not be activated after SW reset even if it was active before the reset.
Data Range: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation); 1 - Disable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset
Default Value: 0 - Enable Continuous Output Activation after SW Reset (legacy
implementation)

6.4.10 Feedback Outputs

6.4.10.1 Use Blinkers Feedback

Address: 449, bit 4

Description: This parameter enables usage of Blinkers output (pin 18) for system and
security feedbacks, like Dallas ID reception confirmation beep, Silent Delay expiration
notification beeps and so on. It is recommended to use buzzer connected to a feedback
output. The Blinker's state will be preserved after SW/HW reset but not after Power
Recycle.
Default value: 0 disabled

6.4.10.2 Use Siren Feedback

Address: 449, bit 0

Description: This parameter enables usage of Siren output (pin 8) for system and
security feedbacks, like Dallas ID reception confirmation beep, Silent Delay expiration
notification beeps and so on. It is recommended to use buzzer connected to a feedback
output.
Default value: 0 disabled

6.4.11 Outputs Inversion Mask

6.4.11.1 Invert Blinkers Output

Address: 503, bit 3

Description: This parameter enables inversion of corresponding output's logic (pin 18).
Inverted output will be normally activated and will be turned off per OTA or serial output
activation command.
0 - Normal polarity (not activated - disconnected; activated grounded)
1 - Inverted polarity (not activated - grounded; activated disconnected)
Default value: 0 Normal polarity

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 117 of 237

6.4.11.2 Invert Gradual Stop (PWM) Output

Address: 502, bit 2

Description: This parameter enables inversion of corresponding output's logic (pin 17).
Inverted output will be normally activated and will be turned off per OTA or serial output
activation command.
0 - Normal polarity (not activated - disconnected; activated grounded)
1 - Inverted polarity (not activated - grounded; activated disconnected)
Default value: 0 Normal polarity

6.4.11.3 Invert Standard Immobilizer Output

Address: 503, bit 5

Description: This parameter enables inversion of corresponding output's logic (pin 7).
Inverted output will be normally activated and will be turned off per OTA or serial output
activation command.
0 - Normal polarity (not activated - disconnected; activated grounded)
1 - Inverted polarity (not activated - grounded; activated disconnected)
Default value: 0 Normal polarity

6.4.11.4 Invert LED Output

Address: 503, bit 0

Description: This parameter enables inversion of corresponding output's logic (pin 6).
Inverted output will be normally activated and will be turned off per OTA or serial output
activation command.
0 - Normal polarity (not activated - disconnected; activated grounded)
1 - Inverted polarity (not activated - grounded; activated disconnected)
Default value: 0 Normal polarity

6.4.12 Usage Counter Configuration

6.4.12.1 General Description

This feature is designed for continuous counting of the Working time of a device,
monitored by one or two units inputs. Example of possible usage is monitoring of an
engine's working hours.
The inputs who's "High State" time is counted are selectable by programming.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 118 of 237

It is possible to assign each of two timers to a specific input, including the option to
assign both timers into the same input. Every input, including ignition, supports "High
State" or "usage" time calculation.
The value of the measured time from each input is located in the units RAM (protected,
not erased on software reset). The unit makes mathematical rounding on partial minutes:
(1:29 will be counted as 1 minute and 1:30 and above as 2 minutes).
Once a day the values of both Usage Counters are backed up to the especial address in
non-volatile memory. The timer keeps time counting (from the value stored in RAM) each
time when the logical level of the appropriate input changes from low to high.
The time counting stops each time the logical level of the input changes from high to low.
Dedicated Read/Write commands over RS232 and OTA are provided for Usage Counters,
including a periodical Usage Counters update OTA packet.

6.4.12.2 Enable Usage Counters

Address: 7, bit 2
Description: In order to start Usage Counters time counting this bit shall be enabled (set
to 1).
Status of this parameter can be changed without reset.
Default: 0 - Disabled

6.4.12.3 Wake up from Hibernation upon Periodical Usage Counter Update

Timer Expiration

Address: 1, bit 7
Description: This bit enables waking up the unit from full hibernation for periodic Usage
Counter update.
Default: 0 - Disabled

6.4.12.4 1st Usage Counter Input

Address: 1330
Description: The byte contains number of the input, utilized by the first Usage Counter.
The unit will use this parameter to backup the value of the 1st Usage Counter from RAM
once a day.
Inputs numbers definition:

Input's name Input's number

Door 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 119 of 237

Input's name Input's number

Shock/Unlock2 1

Ignition 5

Panic 6

Unlock 7

Lock 10

In order to set the use of only one Usage Counter input, select inexistent input for the
second counter (for example 4).
Default: 0

6.4.12.5 2nd Usage Counter Input

Address: 1331
Description: The byte contains number of the input, utilized by a second Usage Counter.
The unit will use this parameter to backup the value of the 2nd Usage Counter from RAM
once a day. In order to set use only one Usage Counter input select inexistent input
number in this parameter (for example 4).
Default: 0

6.4.12.6 Reporting Interval of Usage Counters

Address: 1332
Description: This parameter defines Usage Counters reporting period. Setting this value
by standard programming access is not recommended, as it will require reset to be
implemented. Refer to OTA and serial protocol document for a dedicated update
command description.
Data format and resolution: 1 byte, 1 minute resolution (from 1 minute to 255
minutes). Zero value cancels timers reporting).
Default: 0 reporting canceled

6.4.13 Frequency Metering

6.4.13.1 General Description

Pulse frequency measurement is supported on pair of Cello inputs (Door and Shock
inputs, pins 14 and 15).
The frequency measurement is implemented on the same ports as the analog
measurement; obviously only one of those functionalities can be active at a time).

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 120 of 237

The maximal possible frequency for measurement is 5 kHz, higher frequency causes
saturation of the measurement. The high level of measured signal shall be between 3V to
30V.
It is possible to use the measured number of pulses/second as a source for one of the
following system parameters:

Speed (in cm/sec)

General Purpose pulse frequency measurement

Each of the inputs will be defined as one of the above listed types type and assigned with
an appropriate scaling factor.

6.4.13.2 Frequency Input as a Speed Information Source

If the input is defined as a "speed source", the measured frequency value, multiplied by
an appropriate scaling factor is threaded by the unit as a value of speed [cm/sec]. This
value is replacing a value of speed received from GPS in all the applications: distance
calculations, OTA and serial packets, over/idle speeding detection etc.
In such a case the value of speed reported in OTA message type 0 and vector change
report message type 9) will be valid even if the GPS is not navigating.
The unit monitors and reports the speed source in (see also the Wireless Protocol):

The OTA msg type 0: Byte 16, bit 3.

The OTA msg type 9, Byte 16, bit 3

0 GPS;
1 Pulse frequency input.
NOTE: Only one input at a time is defined as a "speed source"; otherwise (if two inputs
are defined as speed source) the unit will utilize the first one (the smallest Input number
out of two) as a speed source and the second one as a GP input source.
If input on pin 14 is selected as GP freq. counter it will be considered as the 1st freq.
input, if input on pin 15 is selected as GP freq. counter it will be considered as the 2nd
freq. input.
Upon reset
The unit will report last known value of speed (calculated before the reset) until the new
value of speed will be calculated (up to 5 seconds).
Upon Power Up / Wake up after upgrade
The unit will report zero speed until new value of speed will be calculated (up to 5
seconds).

6.4.13.3 General Purpose Pulse Frequency Measurement

If the input is defined as a General Purpose pulse frequency measurement, the system is
continually measuring frequency on this input (while not in full hibernation) and updating
in the following cases:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 121 of 237

Status message type0

Query from COM port

Query from OTA channel

Frequency Threshold violation

6.4.13.4 Auto Calibration of Frequency Inputs

Since the manual calibration is impossible to implement in a reality of multiple
installations it is required to propose a method, enabling calibration in minimal time and
with minimal installer's intervention.
There are two independent processes: calibration of speed and of GP frequency inputs.
The purpose of GP frequency input calibration is to set an optimal resolution for
measurement monitoring in 1 byte of OTA protocol.
The purpose of speed pulses input (Vss) calibration is to make an accurate conversion
from measured frequency in Hz to vehicle's speed in cm/sec.

6.2.20.4.1 Maximum Possible Scaled Frequency

Address 2368-2369
Description: This parameter contains the maximum possible value of scaled frequency,
measured on GP Frequency input.
In case of engine speed it will be a maximum possible engine speed in units of rpm (in
standard vehicle might be assumed as 7000rpm)
This value is used by the unit during the process of auto-calibration.
Default: 7000

6.4.14 Modem & SIM

6.4.14.1 Shorten Cellular Registration Timeout

Address: 1 bit 1
Description: This programmable bit enables/disables a longer GSM registration to (5
minutes). In case of lack of GSM registration after an expiration of this timeout the
modem will be reset.
0 5 minutes GSM registration timeout
1 - 30 seconds timeout
Default: 0 - 5 minutes GSM registration timeout

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 122 of 237

6.4.14.2 Enable Modem Power Control by Door, Shock Input

Address: by Door input: Address1, bit 4

By Shock input: Address 465, bit 1
Description: If enabled (1), the modem will be switched off by Door or Shock input
active state detection; it will be turned back on by input inactive state detection; i.e. it is
required two states switch to use this feature (and not just a push button).
Default: 0 - disabled

6.4.14.3 AHR (Auto Hardware Reset for Modem)

AHR (Auto Hardware Reset) is a process in which the unit performs power recycle to the
Modem (i.e. power down to the Modem for at least 500ms) and to the Micro-processor.
The unit will perform AHR upon occurrence of one of the following scenarios:

Responsive Modem: The Modem responds to AT commands, but No GSM registration

in Ignition On mode for programmable time (configurable by "Registration Lack
Timeout (for AHR)" parameter, address 515). In that case, the unit will perform AHR.
If there is still no GSM registration according to the above conditions, additional AHRs
will be performed, up to a programmable number of retries (configurable by
"Maximum Number of AHR" parameter, address 504, bits 0-3).

Non-Responsive Modem: The modem does not respond to AT commands for 5

consecutive queries. In that case, the unit will reset the Modem (SW reset). If there is
still no response for the Modem after 4 resets, a power recycle to the Modem only
(Pre-AHR) will be performed, after which the unit will wait for 1 second, and open a 30
seconds window in which the queries and resets process will be done again. If there is
still no response from the Modem (i.e. the Pre-AHR mechanism didn't work), AHR will
be performed. The process will repeat up to a programmable number of retries
(configurable by "Maximum Number of AHR" parameter, address 504, bits 0-3).
The unit will create a dedicated event per each AHR (if enabled in Second Configuration
Byte).

6.2.21.3.1 Registration Lack Timeout (for AHR)

Address: 515
Description: stores the timeout value (in minutes), before AHR trigger if the following
conditions are true:

No GSM coverage

Ignition On mode
Data format: 1 byte, unsigned integer, resolution of minute. Zero value cancels the AHR
upon lack of GSM registration.
Default value: 30 minutes

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 123 of 237

6.2.21.3.2 Maximum Number of AHR

Address: 504
Description: The low nibble of this parameter stores the maximal allowed number of
AHR retires in one session and the high nibble is currently reserved.
After the last AHR attempt, no more attempts will be made, even if the modem continues
to be non-responsive or not registered.
If the AHR mechanism is disabled due to sustained non-responsiveness / non-registration
(as explained above), it will only be re-enabled when achieving a full data connection, or
reaching the idle modem management loop, if data connection is prohibited.
Zero retry number will cancel AHR process. Please note that setting this parameter to 0 is
not recommended.

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Reserved Maximum number of AHR retries that will be made

Data format: 1 byte = 2 nibbles.

Default value: bits 4-7 = 0, bits 0-3 = 5.

6.2.21.3.3 Enable AHR Reporting

Address: 1, bit 3
Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will store a plain event with dedicated
transmission reason (address 200) upon each performed AHR.
Default: 0 (Disabled)

6.4.14.4 Modem Homologation Initialization Mode

Address: 525, bit 2

Description: This control bit changes the modem Codec and encryption initialization to
accord with modem homologation requirements.
Normal mode: AT#AUTOATT=1;#CODEC=0 && AT#ENCALG=5,3,
Homologation mode: AT#AUTOATT=0;#CODEC=7 && AT#ENCALG=5,1
Default: 0 (Normal mode)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 124 of 237

6.4.15 Modem Reset Settings

6.4.15.1 Modem Reset Period

Address: 165-166
Description: This parameter defines the time for periodical modem software reset. This
period is restarted upon each manual and automatic modem reset as well as upon
entering full hibernation.
Data format: 2 bytes value, resolution of 1 minutes
Value span: 0 to 65535 (* Zero value in P disables periodical Modem Reset)
Default value (Dec): 1440 (24 hours)

6.4.15.2 Periodical Modem Reset Randomization

Address: 1352
Description: In case of GPRS network failure all the units are reconnecting to CC
simultaneously after the problem is rectified and it causes heavy communication load on
the CC server.
The Periodical Modem Reset timer is also restarted in all the units at the same time, after
concurrent reconnection to GPRS. It causes all the units to repeat simultaneous modem
resets and this way keeps creating peaks of load on customers communication server.
Randomization feature allows the unit to use pseudo random time for Periodical Modem
Reset timer.
The timer is restarted each time to a different value, limited by a programmable
threshold.
(P Tr) Modem Reset interval (P+ Tr)
P - Periodical Modem Reset parameter
Tr - Periodical Modem Reset Threshold
Wrong programming protection: If PTr the unit will NOT use the low limit of
randomization.
Example:
P=30minutes (res=1min) and Tr=45minutes (res=15min) =>-15< modem reset <75
In this case the lower limit of randomization will not be used:
P modem reset interval 75
Data format: Resolution of programmable threshold is 15 minutes, 1 byte
Default value (Dec): 0 (no randomization)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 125 of 237

6.4.16 GSM Band & GPRS Auth Type

Setting proper values of GSM band and PPP GPRS Connection Authentication type enables
accelerating the GSM and GPRS registration process.
On each modems initialization the unit will check GSM band setting and modify it if the
actual GSM band of the modem differs from the one, programmed in this section.
Same way on each modems initialization the unit will check the PPP GPRS Connection
Authentication type and modify it if the actual Authentication type of the modem differs
from programmed in this section.
Backward compatibility programming mode is applied by default. In this mode, the unit
will restore (only if the actual setting differs from the default) the factory setting of the
modem.

6.4.16.1 GSM Band Selection Mode

Address: 1354, bit 7

0 Factory setting, in case of Telit EGSM_DCS_900_1800

1 Manual Mode, see next parameter

Default: 0

6.4.16.2 GSM Band

(Only for Manual GSM Band Selection mode, see GSM Band Selection Mode)

Address: 1354, bits 2-5

Band/mode code Description

0 EGSM/DCS (900/1800)

1 850/PCS (850/1900)

7 GSM 850MHz + DCS 1800MHz

8 GSM 850MHz + PCS 1900MHz

9 850/EGSM/DCS/PCS (850/900/1800/1900)

Default:

Unit Type Default value

Cello 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 126 of 237

6.4.16.3 PPP GPRS Connection Authentication Selection Mode

Address: 1354, bit 6

0 Factory setting, in case of Telit PAP

1 Manual Mode, see next parameter

Default: 0

6.4.16.4 PPP GPRS Connection Authentication type

(Only for Manual Authentication type)

Address: 1354, bits 0-1

0 PAP

1 CHAP

2 AUTO

3 Reserved

Default: 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 127 of 237

6.4.17 SIM PIN

6.4.17.1 Enable Auto SIM PIN Locking

Address: 1348, bit 1

Description: If this bit is enabled (1) the unit will auto-lock the SIM card with the PIN
code programmed on addresses 1326 1329 (dec)
NOTES:

Once enabled, the SIM PIN locking is irreversible; there is no way to cancel SIM PIN
locking by command.

The user has to upload the content of the programming after activation of this flag
and programming in order to re-synchronize between the configuration file and the
actual content of the programming.
IMPORTANT: Incorrect usage of this feature might cause SIM card blocking!
Refer to the description in the New SIM PIN section below for further details.
Default: 0 (disabled)

6.4.17.2 Active SIM PIN

Addresses: 197-200
Name in Programmer: SIM PIN
Description: This parameter stores the PIN code that will be entered to unlock the GSM
SIM card when required.
Data format (GSM): The bytes contain the digits of the PIN, encoded in BCD. The order
of the transmission is bytes with lower address first, lower nibbles first. If only the lower
nibble of a byte is used (this is legal only in the last byte in case this is the last digit of
the PIN), the higher nibble should have all of its bits set (the nibble should contain 15
dec). The rest of the bytes that are not used should contain 0xFF.
Default value (dec): 1234

6.4.17.3 New SIM PIN

Addresses: 1326-1329
This parameter stores the new PIN code that should be used for locking the SIM Card
during the SIM Lock procedure. This code will replace the Active SIM PIN on address 197-
200 upon successful completion of the SIM Lock procedure:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 128 of 237

Boot

Use number from "SIM

PIN" field when PIN code is
requested.

SIM No
Lockin
g
Enable

Yes

SIM Yes
PIN
==New
SIM

Lock SIM with new SIM PIN

code" (old code is needed to
accomplish this procedure)

Replace SIM PIN by New PIN Normal operation

(usage of "SIM PIN")

NOTE: Since the unit is actively modifying content of its programming cells (replacing the
old Pin code by the new one) the configuration file and the actual content of programming
will lose synchronization. It is very important to synchronize them by uploading the actual
content of the configuration memory from the unit before next configuration cycle.
WARNING: Programming the same configuration file twice, without uploading an actual
content of programmable cells after the first programming, will cause immediate blocking
of the SIM card.
Data format (GSM): The bytes contain the digits of the PIN, encoded in BCD. The order
of the transmission is bytes with lower address first, lower nibbles first. If only the lower
nibble of a byte is used (this is legal only in the last byte in case this is the last digit of
the PIN), the higher nibble should have all of its bits set (the nibble should contain 15
dec). The rest of the bytes that are not used should contain FFh.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 129 of 237

Default value (dec): 1234

6.4.17.4 Lock to Certain IMSI

Address: 1914
Description: If this parameter contains a value of 5 or 6 BCD numbers, the unit will
validate an international mobile subscriber identity (MCC + MNC) of its SIM card ~15
seconds after any wake up. If the value of the SIM is different from the value predefined
in this parameter the unit will switch off the modem. If this parameter contains a value
smaller than 5 digits the feature is disabled.

6.5 Power Management

6.5.1 Power Management Mode

Address: 266
Description: This parameter defines power consumption of the unit during Ignition Off
mode.
Power consumption reduction is achieved as a trade off with availability: as the
availability is lower, the power consumption is lower. The main power consumers of the
unit are GPS and GSM modules; the unit switches them off periodically during parking.

Programmed Mode Description Current

Value Description Consumption 8

0 No Both GSM and GPS modules are Average: 37.35mA

hibernation fully active during parking, GPRS Peak: 181.2mA
session active

1 GPS Peeking The GSM modem active, GPRS (while GPS is off)
session active. Average: 23.69mA
The GPS is peeking as per Peak: 104.5mA
programming (see below)

2 Full Both GSM and GPS modules are (while both GPS &
Hibernation in asynchronous peeking as per GSM off)
programming below.
The unit does not respond to Average: 782uA
RS232 queries as well

8In lab conditions, no battery, Vin=13.7V, very good GPRS coverage over 900MHz GSM network.
The results might vary under different test conditions.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 130 of 237

Programmed Mode Description Current

Value Description Consumption 8

Note: In this mode Security

Modification will not be able to
detect Signal Correlation

3 Full Relevant for CFE installations Average: 6mA

Hibernation only.
+ UART Same as Full Hibernation but the
(CFE ) External Serial port is left turned
on. This power mode will wake
the Cello unit when one of the
CFE inputs detects distress
events.

Default value: 2

6.5.2 Enable Automatic Hibernation on Low Power

Address: 1, bit 0
Description: This option allows the unit to enter the full hibernation (with single daily
synchronized GSM-GPS peeking) when main battery of the vehicle considered low. The
unit will leave full hibernation mode upon distress or ignition on.
Default: 0 - disabled

6.5.3 Hibernation Mode Delay

Address: 271-272
Description: This parameter defines time interval between Stop Event and entering any
programmed Hibernation Mode.
Note: a reception of message from server side (except ACK responses) in the delay period
will reset the delay (i.e. the unit will count again the configured delay from last message
reception before going to hibernation).
Data format: 16-bit unsigned integer, 16 seconds resolution
Value span: 0x01 (16 seconds) through 0xFFFF (291 hours)
Default value: 60, (16 minutes)

6.5.4 Enable Pre-Hibernation Update

Address: 4, bit 6 for event

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 131 of 237

4, bit 7 for distress

Description: This parameter enables and disables an update, before entering the full
hibernation mode.
The update is not generated during GSM or GPS communication peeks, only between the
Stop Event and entering the full hibernation; 15 seconds before an expiration of
Hibernation Mode Delay timeout (Address 271).
In case of Hibernation Mode Delay timeout = 0, the event will be generated just after the
Stop event.
Default: Both disabled (zeroes)

6.5.5 Enable Data Forwarding from Serial Port by SMS (in Hibernation)

Address: 4 bit 5
Description: If this parameter is disabled, the unit will not try forwarding data from 3 rd
party device connected to unit's COM port (over CSP or Transparent Data protocols)
through SMS in hibernation. (in case GPRS is not available or disabled, the forwarded
data will be accumulated in unit's buffer).
Default value: Disabled (1)

6.5.6 GPS Peeking

6.5.6.1 GPS Peeking Max On Time

Address: 263
Description: GPS peeking is a power management of GPS receiver, which enables to
reduce its power consumption.
GPS peeking is activated in Ignition Off mode only, when Power Management mode is
defined as 1or 2. Except for CelloTrack family, which is explained in section
_d2h_bmk__Ref441484482_22.

This parameter defines the maximum amount of time the GPS is kept turned on while
peeking. The GPS will be turned off once a fix is achieved, or if the Max. On Time expires.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 132 of 237

Data format: 8-bit unsigned integer, 16 seconds resolution

Value span: 01h (16 seconds) through 255 (68 minutes); zero value is illegal and
shouldn't be used
Default value: 5 (1 minute 20 seconds)

6.5.6.2 GPS Peeking Off Time (of Compact and 370-50)

Address: 264-265
Description: This parameter defines the amount of time between GPS peeks. (Refer to
the chart in GPS Peeking Max On Time). During this time the GPS is turned off, to
conserve energy.
Data format: 16-bit unsigned integer, 16 seconds resolution
Value span: 01h (16 seconds between two consecutive peeks) through FFFFh (~12 days
between two consecutive peeks)
Default value: 675 (3 hours from the end of one peek to the start of the next one)

6.5.7 GSM Peeking

6.5.7.1 GSM Peeking Maximum Network Registration Time

Address: 270
Description: GSM Peeking is a power management of GSM Modem, which allow to
reduce its power consumption.
GSM peeking is activated in Ignition Off mode only, when Power management mode is
defined as 2.

Maximum Network Registration Time: This parameter defines time interval, given to
GSM modem for registration into cellular network. If registration wasnt accomplished
during that time the modem is being turned off for Off Time.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 133 of 237

If registration is being accomplished, the modem is kept turned on for time period defined
in Modem On Time parameter. The modem is switched back off when Modem On time
expires and there is no data transfer for at least 10 seconds.
Data format: 8-bit unsigned integer, 16 seconds resolution
Value span: 01h (16 seconds) through 255 (72.8 hours)
Default value: 4 (1 minute and 4 seconds)

6.5.7.2 GSM Peeking Modem Off time

Address: 268-269
Description: This parameter defines the amount of time between GSM peeks. (Refer to
the chart in GSM Peeking Maximum Network Registration Time). During this time the
GSM Modem is turned off, to conserve energy).
Data format: 16-bit unsigned integer, 16 seconds resolution.
Value span: 02h (32 seconds between two consecutive peeks) through FFFFh (~12 days
between two consecutive peeks). Values below 32 seconds (<02h) are illegal and
shouldnt be used.
Default value: 225 (1 hour from the end of one peek to the start of the next one)

6.5.7.3 GSM Peeking Maximum Modem On time

Address: 267
Description: This parameter defines time the modem is kept turned on after the end of
the GSM registration. If GPRS is enabled, the unit will dial GPRS and connect to the
communication server during this time.
Data format: 16-bit unsigned integer, 16 seconds resolution
Value span: 01h through FFFFh; value of 0 is illegal and shouldnt be used
Default value: 4 (1 minute and 4 seconds)

6.5.8 Battery Charging

The unit is equipped by a built in Li-Ion/Polymer CCCV charger, applying 0.5C (constant
current), charge the battery up to 4.1V, then CV (constant voltage) charge till 4.15V.
The charger will be activated in Ignition On mode (with an exception described below) in
temperature range between 0C and 45C.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 134 of 237

The full charge time of the standard 700mAh battery is ~2hours.

6.5.8.1 Maximum Backup Battery Extra Charge Time

Address: 138
Name in Programmer: Maximum extra charge time
Description: This parameter defines the maximum time for extra backup battery charge
in Ignition Off mode. The charge process begins upon Stop in case of detection of low
level of backup battery (see corresponding programming parameter), and continues for
the time defined in this parameter (if the unit does not enter hibernation).
Data format: 8-bit unsigned integer, resolution of 10.24 sec
Value span: 00h to FFh
Default value: 117 (~20 minutes)

6.5.8.2 Charge Irrespective of Operational Mode

Address: 1350 bit 0

Description: While this bit is set (1) the unit will activate the built in charger if the main
power source presents. In this case neither operational mode, not the ignition or
movement detection affect start or stop charging; only the logic of the built in charger
affects the charge process.
When this bit is disabled (0, legacy mode) the unit activates the charger only during
standby engine on mode and for limited time upon switching the ignition off.
Default value: 0 - Disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 135 of 237

6.6 Informative Parameters

6.6.1 Last Distance Event

Address: 85-88
Description: This parameter stores odometer value (in base units) recorded upon last
Distance event generation. This parameter is not recommended for user modification, it is
managed by the unit for recovery situations.
If upon programming the value programmed in this parameter will be higher than the
value of odometer, the unit will overwrite it with the value of odometer.
Data format: The parameter is a 32-bit integer
Value span: 32bits range
Default value: 0

6.6.2 Field for Customer Use

Address: 1314 1317

Description: This field is designed to store customers proprietary data (like specific
EEPROM content identifier).
Data format: Customer defined
Default value: zeros

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 136 of 237

7 Distance and Speed Events

7.1 Distance Events

7.1.1 Enable Distance Updates

Address: 99 bit 1 for Plain Events

102 bit 1 for Distress Events
Description: This parameter enables generation of the Events and/or Distresses upon
the passage of a certain distance.
The distance updates are generated with respect to Home or Roam GSM network and the
speed of the vehicle. Normally the customer would expect reported distance to be longer
in Roam networks (to save on a communication in roaming GSM) and on high speeds,
where the rear events can still provide a good picture of the root.
Default value: Both zeros (disabled)

7.1.2 Trip for a Distance Event

Address: 89 91 for Home Network

32 34 for Roam Network
Description: This parameter defines a distance between two consequences Distance
updates (events or distresses). The distance is in basic distance units.
Data format: The parameter is an unsigned a 24-bit integer
Default value: 5

7.1.3 Distance Event Multiplier for HIGH SPEED Mode

Address: 92, bits 0-3 for Home Network

35, bits 0-3 for Roam Network
Description: This parameter defines a multiplying factor of distance update for normal
and high speeds. The speed is considered "high" when higher then programmed in
Velocity threshold for HIGH SPEED mode on address 455.
For example: if Trip for a Distance event is set to 100 meters, and Distance Event
Multiplier for roaming is set to 4, the unit will set distance updates in roaming mode to
every 400 meters.
Default value: Both 1

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 137 of 237

7.2 Over (and Idle) Speed

7.2.1 Velocity Threshold for Over Speed Start Event

Address: 93
Description: This parameter stores velocity threshold used for Over Speeding session
start. If velocity of the vehicle is higher than this threshold, for longer than programmed
in the Over Speed Duration filter parameter, the unit will consider over-speeding. If
corresponding updates are enabled, the unit will generate event or/and distress.
Note that the Overspeed start will be registered on a velocity of ~2km/h higher than
programmed. In addition, this threshold is only used when not in Trailer mode and not
in Input dependent Over Speed mode
Value resolution: Units in 32 cm/sec
Default value: 91 (105km/h)

7.2.2 Velocity Threshold for Over Speed End Event

Address: 94
Description: This parameter stores velocity threshold used for Over Speeding session
end (only if the Over Speeding session is already open). If velocity of the vehicle gets
lower than this threshold, for longer than programmed in Over Speed Duration filter
parameter (or immediately as per the configuration flag described below), the unit will
consider end of over-speeding.
If corresponding updates are enabled, the unit will generate event or/and distress.
Note that this threshold is only used when not in Trailer mode and not in Input
dependent Over Speed mode
Value resolution: Units in 32 cm/sec
Default value: 87 (100km/h)

7.2.3 Filter of Over Speed Duration

Address: 95
Description: This parameter stores timeout value, used to consider the speed violation
start/stop. It actually defines the over speed duration which will cause a corresponding
update (if enabled).
Value resolution & span: Duration resolution is 2.5 Seconds. Duration Span from: 0
seconds (0x00h), to 10min 30 sec (0xFEh).
Default value: 4 (10 seconds)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 138 of 237

7.2.4 Do not use Time Filter to Close Over Speed Session

Address: 492, bit 4

Description: If this bit is set, any open over speed sessions will be closed when the
speed of the vehicle will get lower then "Velocity threshold for GPS over Speed End"
threshold.
Default value: 0 (disabled)

7.2.5 Alternative Over Speed Threshold for Input Dependent Mode

Address: 2391
Description: The unit supports automatic change of over-speed thresholds while certain
input is triggered.
This is useful to change over-speed threshold while raining (in this case the input will be
connected to the wipers wire) or at night (in this case the input will be connected to the
vehicle lights).
Function 12 is available in a list of options available for Function assigned byte in inputs
configuration. When it is selected for any input (except ignition), and this input is
triggered, the unit will automatically use speed threshold programmed on address 2391
as both Over-speed start and Over-speed end thresholds.
NOTES:

Over-speed threshold may change only while over-speed session is NOT active.

If the input changes its state while the over-speed session is active the unit will
keep using over-speed thresholds selected upon over-speed session start.

If both the Trailer mode and Input dependent Over Speed modes are active
concurrently the unit will select the lowest speed threshold out of two.
Specific Transmission Reason byte of Over-Speed alert
Upon detection of over-speed violation the unit is sensing event or/and distress with
transmission reason 34(start)/42 (stop). The Specific Transmission Reason byte of
those messages will contain value 1 if the unit is utilizing alternative Over-speed
thresholds while generating them.
This parameter contains an alternative value of Over-speed threshold, used when an
input, programmed as Over-speed threshold control is triggered.
The same value is used for both Over-speed start and Over-speed end thresholds.
The over-speed time filter (programmed on address 95) shall expire prior to alert
generation irrespectively to the selected speed thresholds.
Resolution: 32 cm/sec
Default value: 70km/h

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 139 of 237

7.2.5.1 Velocity Threshold for Idle Speed Start Event

Address: 97
Description: This parameter stores velocity threshold used for Idle Speeding session
start (Idle Speeding refers to when the vehicle is parking with a working engine). If velocity of
the vehicle gets lower than this threshold, for longer than programmed in Idle Speed
Duration filter parameter (from ignition on or from higher speed), the unit will consider
Idle Speeding start.
If corresponding updates are enabled, the unit will generate event or/and distress.
Value resolution: Units in 32 cm/sec
Default value: 14 (16 km/h)

7.2.5.2 Velocity Threshold for Idle End Event

Address: 96
Description: This parameter stores velocity threshold used for Idle Speeding end (only if
the Idle Speeding session is already open). If velocity of the vehicle gets higher than this
threshold, for longer than programmed in Over Speed Duration filter parameter (or
immediately as per the configuration flag described below), the unit will consider end of
idle-speeding.
If corresponding updates are enabled, the unit will generate event or/and distress.
Value resolution: Units in 32 cm/sec
Default value: 16 (19 km/h)

7.2.5.3 Filter of Idle Speed Duration

Address: 98
Description: Timeout value, used to consider the idle speed violation start /end.
Value resolution & span: Duration resolution is 2.5 seconds.
Duration Span from: 0 seconds (0x00), to 10 min 50 sec (0xFE)
Default value: 4 (10 seconds)

7.2.5.4 Multiplier for Idle Speed Start Detection Time Filter

Address: 492, bits 0-3

Description: This parameter contains a value of multiplier, used to increase dramatically
Idle Speed Start detection time.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 140 of 237

Time for generation = Idle Speed * (Multiplier +1)

Idle Speed Start Duration Filter

Value of 0 disables multiplier.

Default: zero

7.2.5.5 Do not use Time Filter to Close Idle Speed Session

Address: 492, bit 5

Description: If this bit is set, any open idle speed sessions will be closed when the speed
of the vehicle will get higher than "Velocity threshold for GPS Idle Speed End" for longer
than 10 seconds.
Default value: 0 (disabled)

7.2.5.6 Start Idle Speed Timer with Ignition On

Address: 492, bit 6

Description: When this bit is set, the unit will start counting time to Idle Speed Start
from the Ignition On detection. Otherwise (if this bit is zero) the timer activated from the
first time the speed is getting lower than Velocity threshold for GPS Idle Speed Start
Default value: 0 (disabled)

7.2.5.7 Create Idle/Over Speed End Update for an Open Session per Ignition Off

Address: 492, bit 7

Description: When this bit is set, the unit will close opened Idle/Over Speed sessions
upon ignition off and generate an appropriate updates.
Otherwise (this bit is zero) the unit will not generate an appropriate updates and simply
close any open speed session upon Ignition off.
Default value: 0 (disabled)

7.2.6 Events and Distress Control

7.2.6.1 Enable Distress for Idle Speed Start/End

Address: 102, bit 3

Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate distress session upon every Idle
Speed start /end.
Default value: 0 (disabled)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 141 of 237

7.2.6.2 Enable Events for Idle Speed Start/End

Address: 99, bit 3

Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate an event upon every Idle Speed start
/end.
Default value: 0 (disabled)

7.2.6.3 Enable Events for Over Speed Start/End

Address: 99, bit 2

Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate an event upon every Over Speed start
/end.
Default value: 0 (disabled)

7.2.6.4 Enter Distress for Over Speed Start/End

Address: 102, bit 2

Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate distress session upon every Over
Speed start /end.
Default value: 0 (disabled)

7.3 Sudden Course Changed and Sudden Speed Change

Sensors

Sudden Course Change and Sudden Speed Change sensors are derived from the GPS
output; they analyze the delta speed and course between GPS fixes.
The speed and course thresholds are provided separately for each of 4 ranges of speed.

7.3.1 Speed Thresholds V0, V1 and V2

Address: V0-473
V1-474
V2-475
Description: The 4 speed ranges are defined by 3 speed thresholds: V0, V1 and V2

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 142 of 237

Speed Range 3
V2
Speed Range 2
V1
Speed Range 1
V0
Speed Range 0
0 km/h

The speed ranges threshold (V0, V1, V2) must meet the condition: V0<V1<V2
Data format: 8 bits parameters with resolution of 16 cm/sec

7.3.2 Delta Speed and Delta Course for Speed Range X

Description: The sensors will trigger if the delta speed or/and course between two
adjacent valid fixes (the unit is getting an updated GPS data fix every 1 second)
exceeds a predefined speed or/and course thresholds for the specific speed
range (if the current or last fix is invalid, the sensors won't trigger).
The following table contains address of speed and course thresholds for each speed range:

Harsh Braking Acceleration Course Delta

Threshold Threshold Threshold
Speed Range 8 bits parameters 8 bits parameters 8 bits parameters
with resolution of with resolution of with resolution of
16 cm/sec 16 cm/sec 0.016 rad

Speed Range 0 476 511 480

Speed Range 1 477 512 481

Speed Range 2 478 513 482

Speed Range 3 479 514 483

Zero value in any of the parameters above will cancel the corresponding sensor for the
specific speed range.
Default Values:

Address (Dec) Value (Dec) Value

473 34 19.6 km/h

474 104 60 km/h

475 173 99.6 km/h

476 17 9.8 km/h

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 143 of 237

Address (Dec) Value (Dec) Value

477 17 9.8 km/h

478 17 9.8 km/h

479 17 9.8 km/h

480 49 45

481 49 45

482 49 45

483 49 45

511 17 9.8 km/h

512 17 9.8 km/h

513 17 9.8 km/h

514 17 9.8 km/h

7.3.3 Events, Distress and HRLS Updates Control

7.3.3.1 Sudden Speed Change (Acceleration and Harsh Braking)

Address: 99, bit 4 for Events

102, bit 4 for Distress
103, bit 4 for HRLS
Description: If this bit is set, the unit will generate a corresponding update for any
detected harsh acceleration and harsh braking.
Default Values: zeros (disabled)

7.3.3.2 Sudden Course Change

Address: 99, bit 5 for Events

102, bit 5 for Distress
103, bit 5 for HRLS
Description: If this bit is set, the unit will generate a corresponding update for any
detected harsh course change.
Default Values: zeros (disabled)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 144 of 237

7.3.4 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence

Speed limiting Geo-Fence enables the fleet manager to define speed limits within geo-
Fence boundaries. Each Geo-Fence entry in the configuration memory can define 1 of 4
possible speed thresholds. The Speed limiting Geo-Fence feature is enabled by setting the
field TOE (Type of Entry) in the Geo-Fence entry to 6. The unit can handle up to 4 over
lapping speed zones sessions concurrently.
Speed violations are reported via a dedicated type 0 message whenever the speed within
the Geo-Fence exceeds the configured speed threshold. End of speed violation session will
be reported when one of the following events occurs:
1. After violation start the speed fails lower then zones specific threshold according to
programmed over speed rules (after expiration of over-speed end time filter).
2. The unit leaves Geo-Zone boundaries.
3. Specific zone timeout expired (while inside zone boundaries).
Speed limiting decisions will be taken (both for start and for end of over speed) based on
legacy time filter of over speed (at address 95).

7.3.5 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Enable

Speed Limiting Geo-Fence is enabled by setting the value of TOE (Type Of Entry) filed to
6. Please see TOE - Type Of Entry

7.3.6 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Threshold Select

Each Geo-Fence entry has 2 bits filed called Speed Limiting Threshold Select. The filed
can select one of 1 of 4 possible threshold values. The 4 Geo-Fence Speed Limiting
thresholds are defined in

Speed Limiting Threshold Select

(Bits 31,30) Address of Speed Limit parameter
Bit 31 Bit 30 in Configuration memory

0 0 1917

0 1 1918

1 0 1919

1 1 1920

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 145 of 237

7.3.7 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Threshold

Address: 1917, 1918, 1919, 1920

Description: These 4 parameters define the Geo-Fence speed limiting thresholds. The
speed limiting threshold is defined in units of Km/H.
Default: 20, 30, 40, 50

7.3.8 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Alerts Enable

Generation of Speed limiting zone shall be enabled as follows:

Address: 1004, bit 5 Event
1005, bit 5 Distress
Description: : If this bit is enabled the unit will generate an alerts upon violation of
selected speed limit of the active Speed limiting zone. Speed session started within the
premises of a geozone will be terminated when the speed goes below the speed threshold
(inside the premises of the GeoFence) or when the vehicle goes out of the GeoFence.
Speed Limiting violation Start event: Type 0, TR212, STR=geo fence index.
Speed Limiting violation End event: Type 0. TR213, STR=geo fence index.
Default: 0 both disabled

7.3.9 Speed Limiting Geo-Fence Output Activations

The same output activations properties used for Driver Behavior over speeding will be
used for Speed Limiting Geo-Fence. The OverSpeed feedback bit must be set in
Feedback for driver behavior violations bitmask to enable Speed Limiting Geo-Fence
outputs.
Please refer to:
Output, auto-activated upon continuous driver behavior violation detection
Output activation pattern (upon Continuous driver behavior violation)
NOTE: When Speed Limiting Zone is selected in the GeoFence configuration the Fence
generic output activation will be automatically disabled.

7.4 Go (Start Movement) and Halt (Stop Movement) Events

This feature is intended to detect slow movement in traffic jams. The session is very
similar to Idle Speed feature described above, although serves for a different purpose
simultaneously with Idle Speed detection.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 146 of 237

The session proposes set of programmable parameters, identical to those of Idle Speed
Algorithm:

"Go/Halt" speed detection Threshold

"Go/Halt" Threshold Time Filter

"Go/Halt" session configuration flags

"Go/Halt" events/distress control

The Go/Halt session is also used for Curve Smoothing feature to prevent generation of
unnecessary events of "course change" during parking.

7.4.1 Go/Halt Speed Detection Threshold

Address: 1387-1388
Description: This parameter stores velocity threshold for detection of movement start
(GO event) and movement end (Halt event).
If measured velocity is higher than this threshold for longer than the Time Threshold,
"Go" event will be triggered.
If measured velocity is lower than this threshold for longer than the Time Threshold,
"Halt" event will be triggered.
Value resolution: Units in cm/sec
Default value: 5 km/h

7.4.2 Go/Halt Time Threshold Filter

Address: 1389
Description: This cell stores a time filter for "Go/Halt events" generation, while the
speed of the vehicle complies with the logical condition described in the parameter above.
Value resolution & span: Duration resolution is 1 second. Duration Span from: 0
seconds (0x00), to 255 seconds (0xFF).
Default value: 3 (3 seconds)

7.4.3 Go/Halt Session Control

These parameters allow setting especial aspects of the Go/Halt session.

7.4.3.1 Multiplier for Go/Halt Time Threshold Filter for "Halt" Detection

Address: 1390, bits 0-3

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 147 of 237

Description: Allows enlarging the "Halt Detection filter", in order to prevent Halt
detections on traffic lights. The value of the Time Threshold filter will be multiplied by the
value in this parameter.
Value of zero will cancel the Time Threshold filter for "Halt" event detection.
Default value: 0 Cancel Time Threshold for "Halt"

7.4.3.2 Do not use Time Threshold Filter for "Go" Detection

Address: 1390, bit 4

Allows immediate "Go" detection, ignoring Time Threshold filter.
Default value: 0 use time threshold for "Go"

7.4.3.3 Enable Go/Halt Updates

Address: 496, bit 2 for Events

497, bit 2 for Distress
Description: If this bit is set, the unit will generate a corresponding (Go or Halt) update
upon detection.
Default Values: zeros (disabled)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 148 of 237

8 Time and Trip Events

8.1 Start and Stop Alerts

8.1.1 Start Alert Generation Time Filter

Address: 104
Name in Programmer: Start Event Time Filter
Description: This parameter stores time filter, defining a required duration of stable
Ignition On state (after ignition state change) for triggering Start (driving session) alert.
The control of alert type (plain event / distress event) is made from Ignition Input
Settings folder.
Value resolution & span: Duration resolution is 2.56 seconds.
Default value: 7.74 sec.

8.1.2 Stop Alert Generation Time Filter

Address: 105
Name in Programmer: Stop Event Time Filter
Description: This parameter stores time filter, defining a required duration of stable
Ignition Off state (after ignition state change) for triggering Stop (driving session) alert.
The control of alert type (plain event / distress event) is made from Ignition Input
Settings folder.
Value resolution & span: Duration resolution is 2.56 seconds
Default value: 7.74 sec.

8.2 Time-based Alert

This group of parameter controls time period of the updates, generated by the unit
periodically between "Start" and "Stop" (when ignition switch is on). Time alerts or
periodical updates are not generated after "Stop" (when ignition switch is off).
This period is controlled also by the OTA Tracking Command and applied on the fly with
no reset.
Time-based alert period might be automatically modified by the unit in real time as a
function of the following conditions:

GSM condition: Home, Roam GSM network or No GSM coverage mode

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 149 of 237

Speed: High Speed mode or Normal Speed mode.

There is also a possibility of dynamic Time-based alert period modification as a function of
speed, refer to V-Trek feature below.

8.2.1 Time Alerts Resolution Definer

Address: 106, bit 7 for Home network

499, bit 7 for Roam network
Description: This bit defines resolution of the Timed Event Period. This resolution can be
either 4 (when this bit is 0) or 90 seconds (when this bit is 1).
Resolution of 4 seconds enables setting Time-based alert period up to every ~8.4
minutes, resolution of 90seconds, up to ~3:10 hours
Note: In case 3 parameters: " Force one second resolution Rome Mode ", "Resolution
Definer in Roaming Mode" and "Time Report Period value in Roaming Mode" parameters
are zero (value on address 499 and 526 bit 1 are 0), the unit will use Home parameters
(programmed on address 106 and 526 bit 0) during Roaming.
Default value: 0 resolution of time-based alert period is 4 seconds

8.2.2 Time Alerts Period Value

Address: 106, bits 0-6 for Home network (TEPH)

499, bits 0-6 for Roam network (TEPR)
Description: This parameter stores a Time-based alert Period value with resolution
configured in previous parameter (4 or 90 seconds). Value 0 disables the time-based
alerts.
Note: In case 3 parameters: " Force one second resolution Rome Mode ", "Resolution
Definer in Roaming Mode" and "Time Report Period value in Roaming Mode" parameters
are zero (value on address 499 and 526 bit 1 are 0), the unit will use Home parameters
(programmed on address 106 and 526 bit 0) during Roaming.
Default value: 75 (300 seconds when resolution is set to 4 seconds)

8.2.3 Force one second resolution Roaming Mode

Address: 526, bit 0 for Home GSM network

526, bit 1 for Roam GSM network
Description: This parameter forces the resolution of Time-based alert to one second,
irrespectively to the values, programmed on addresses 106 and 499.
Default value: both 0 (disabled)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 150 of 237

8.2.4 Time Alert Period Multiplier for High Speed Mode

Address: 92, bits 4-7 for Home GSM network

35, bits 4-7 for Roam GSM network
Description: This parameter stores the Multiplier of time-based alert Period during High
Speed mode. For example if the programmed value is 2, on speed higher then Velocity
Threshold for High Speed mode, the unit will generate two times less time-based alerts in
a given period (i.e. if when not in High Speed mode the unit generates a time-based alert
every x seconds, in High Speed mode the unit will generate a time-based alert every 2x
seconds). Value of zero disables the time-based alerts in High Speed mode.
Default value: 1

8.2.5 Time Report Period Multiplier for NOIP Mode

Address: 485
Description: This parameter enables automatic change of time events period during NO
IP mode (while GPRS is unavailable):
The basic time event period is multiplied by the factor programmed in this parameter.
Note: value of Zero is legal and considered by the unit as "1".
Default value: 1

8.2.6 Table of Time-based Alert Period Calculation

Home Network Roam Network

Time-based Time-based Time-based Time-based

alerts Resolution alerts Resolution alerts alerts
Definer= 0 Definer= 1 Resolution Resolution
Definer= 0 Definer= 1

Low TEPH * 4 (TEPH +1) * 90 TEPR * 4 (TEPR +1) * 90

Speed seconds seconds seconds seconds

High HSpeedHm * HSpeedHm * HSpeedRm * HSpeedRm *

Speed (TEPH * 4 (TEPH +1)* 90 (BPVR * 4 (BPVR+1)* 90
seconds) seconds seconds) seconds

TEPH Time-based alert Period in home network, bits 0:6 of address 106

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 151 of 237

TEPR Basic period value in roam network, bits 0:6 of address 499 (value of zero will
cause the unit to use Home settings during roaming)

HSpeedHm Time-based alert period multiplier for high speed mode in Home
network, (bits 4:7 of address 92)

HSpeedRm Time-based alert period multiplier for high speed mode in Roam
network, (bits 4:7 of address 35)

8.2.7 V-Trek: Dynamic Time-based Alerts Period Control as a Function of

Speed

V-Trek algorithm proposes an advanced automatic control of Time-based alert period

(Plain Events Only), intended to reduce communication costs by reduction of transmission
number without decrease in alert quality.
The V-Trek algorithm controls Time-based alerts period as a function of speed. Obviously
the time-based events shall be enabled in order to use V-Trek.
The V-Trek configuration relays on 4 parameters minimum and maximum speed as well
as transmission interval for each speed (min and max). A lower time interval causes more
frequent transmissions.
NOTE: If all 4 parameters are set to zero, the V-Trek feature is not used. If the
parameters are set, normal Time-based alert management is canceled and replaced by V-
Trek.

(T1, V1) (T2, V2)

Reverse slope Normal slope

= 2

(T1, V1) (T2, V2)

1 2 Time
= 2 = 2 = 2

8.2.7.1 Normal Slope of V-Trek

Normal slope is used when it is required to reduce number of transmissions on high

speeds. The logic behind this is that number of turns on highways is lower than in city;

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 152 of 237

reducing location updates 5 times on a highway will not harm the quality of the route
traced on a map.

on speed lower than V1 the unit will not generate an events.

on speed higher than V2 the unit will constantly transmit with resolution of T2.
On speed in range between V1 and V2 the transmission rate is dynamically changing: the
update rate becomes slower as speed raises.
Normal Slope is considered when the V2>V1.

8.2.7.2 Reverse Slope of V-Trek

Reverse slope is used when it is required to reduce number of transmissions on low

speeds. The logic behind this is to reduce number of transmissions sent while driving in
traffic jams.

on speed lower than V2 the unit will constantly transmit with resolution of T2

on speed higher than V1 the unit will constantly transmit with resolution of T1
On speed in range between V1 and V2 the transmission rate is dynamically changing: the
update rate becomes faster as speed raises.
Reverse Slope is considered when the V2<V1.

8.3 Curve Smoothing

The idea behind this feature is to provide a good correlation between the reported
locations to the roads on a map without significant increase of communication cost.
Neither time nor distance events enable tracking as a function of road curves (note that it
is possible to utilize sudden course change detection for "curve smoothing" with
significant traffic increase), and the path on the map doesn't appear accurate enough, as
shown below.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 153 of 237

Detecting movement vector change dramatically improves the stickiness to the road and
readability of the reports, but will also dramatically increase the traffic:

The vector change detection has to be supported by data compression in order to ensure
good stickiness to a road curve for a reasonable price.
The vector change detection occurrence may be reported as a plain/distress events with
TR204 (vector change Report), or as a bulk of up to 6 vector change detection
occurrences, compressed into a single message type 9 , sub-data D (refer to a wireless
protocol for more details).

8.3.1 Enable Vector Change Detection Events /Distress

Address: 1433, bit 0 for Events

1433, bit 1 for Distress
Description: If this bit is enabled, upon generation of Start (or the first GPS Nav. Start
after Start if there is no valid GPS upon Start) the unit stores reference vector of course.
The unit stores reference GPS stamp value (time, date, latitude, longitude, speed and
course) every time it is detecting change of course's vector.
The stored reference course value is compared with the value of course received with
every new valid GPS frame. If the received value of course differs from stored one more
then the value of vector change programmable parameter (5 by default), the unit
will log vector change detection occurrence (not event in the logged memory yet but in
a volatile memory) and replaces reference course value by the new one.
Note that if compressed vector change report is enabled, the value of this parameter will
be ignored.
If compressed vector change report (next parameter) is disabled the unit will
generate a dedicated event/distress type 0 with TR204 (Vector Change Report).
Default: Both disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 154 of 237

8.3.2 Prevent Curve Smoothing Message Generation during "Halt" Mode

Address: 1433, bit 3

Description: If this bit is enabled (1):

The unit will stop Curve Smoothing message generation upon "Halt" session start
(irrespectively to GO/HALT event generation enable/disable programming flag).

The Curve Smoothing message generation will restart upon "Go" session start
(irrespectively to GO/HALT event generation enable/disable programming flag).
Default: disabled (0)

8.3.3 Enable Compressed Vector Change Report

Address: 1433, bit 2

Description: If this bit is enabled, settings of bit's 0 and 1 of this byte (previous
parameter) will be ignored. In this case the compressed vector change data will be sent
by the unit in the following cases:

Upon detection of 6th vector change detection occurrence. In this case the system
will generate a Msg type 9 containing all 6 vector change detection occurrences.

Timeout. If at least one vector change event is stored in unit's memory and no other
vector changes were generated by the unit during the pre-programmed period, the
system will generate Msg type 9 containing all previous vector change detection
occurrences.

Upon Stop. Msg type 9 containing all previous vector change detection occurrences
(if any) will be generated immediately upon stop report.

Upon reset command the Msg type 9 containing all previous vector change
detection occurrences (if any) will be generated.
The Compressed Vector change Report Msg type 9 will be logged in the same message
stack as plain event type 0, will utilize the same sequence of numerator and acknowledge
rules.
The Compressed Vector change Report Msg type 9 will NEVER be generated as real-time
or distress event, only as logged event.
Upon power up/reset the unit will record reference course/coordinates upon reception of
the first valid GPS packet.
Note: When no significant course changes are detected by the unit (for example when
driving long straight roads), the unit will send periodic Compressed Vector Change
Reports to avoid compressed data overflow.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 155 of 237

8.3.4 Compressed Vector Change Report Timeout

Address: 1434
Description: This parameter contains a timeout to generate Msg type 9 containing all
logged vector change detection occurrences before six occurrences were accumulated.
This parameter will take affect when:

Compress Vector change Detection is enabled,

At least one vector change detection logged

No vector change detection occurrence is logged by the unit during the period defined
in this parameter
Range and resolution: Unsigned integer 8 bits, resolution of minutes
Default: 10 minutes

8.3.5 Vector Change Detection Angle

Address: 1435
This parameter defines the minimum course change from last logged event, considered as
Vector change Detection occurrence. Possible values are 0 to 180.
Range and resolution: 8 bits, unsigned integer, resolution of degrees
Default: 5

8.4 Communication Idle Alerts

8.4.1 Time between Communication Idle Alerts

Address: 70-71
Name in Programmer: Time between Comm.Idle Transmissions
Description: This parameter defines the maximum time without any communication. If a
message is not received within this timeout, an idle communication alert is registered.
The Idle Transmission alerts are independent from Ignition state. They will trigger even in
a Full Hibernation mode; it is possible (configuration bit described below) to wake up the
unit from the full hibernation in order to try delivering this type of alert in real time.
This algorithm is frequently used as a "Heart Bit" of the unit, the "Keep Alive" messaging.
Data format: 16-bit unsigned integer, 1 minute resolution.
Default value: 30 (minutes)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 156 of 237

8.4.2 Event and Distress Controls for Communication Idle Alert

Address: 493, bit 0 for plain event

494, bit 0 for distress
Description: This bit enables alerting Idling of Communication with period programmed
in Time.
Default value: Event enabled (1), distress disabled (0)

8.4.3 Do not Wake Up from Hibernation upon Comm. Idle Distress

Address: 494, bit 7

Description: If this bit is set (1), the unit will not generate a distress Communication
Idle alert in full hibernation, and therefore will not wake up from full hibernation upon
expiration of Time between Communication Idle Alerts timeout.
Default value: 0 - wake up from full hibernation to alert Comm. Idle

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 157 of 237

8.5 Driver Authentication

There are a few possible usages for the Dallas (iButton) key in the Cellocator unit:

As driver ID for fleet management application: In this case the driver can use any
Dallas key to identify himself; the Driver to Dallas association is performed on the
server side.

As driver ID for fleet management application with pre-programmed list of "known

drivers" (30 drivers maximum): In this case only the Dallas code from the list will
release an immobilization of the vehicle and will cause successful driver identification
alert to the server.

As vehicle owner identification for car-alarm application (security units only): In this
case the driver might identify himself with pre-programmed Dallas in order to release
the security unit from Alarm Armed state, while only 30 codes can be pre-
programmed.

As a Trailer ID (can work together with Driver ID over the same 1-Wire bus).
The driver authentication in fleet management application enables monitoring working
hours of each driver and tracking driver's activity.
The driver supposes to identify himself with his unique Dallas key before (or immediately
with) switching ignition on. From this moment to the end of the journey all the location
messages generated by Cellocator unit will include code of this Dallas.
The unit will erase this code from its memory shortly after switching Ignition to off.
There are two alerts dedicated to the Driver Authentication features: New Dallas Code
Received and Driving without authentication. There is also a dedicated alert for Trailer
connection status change.
Note: The ignition event initiating the authentication processes could be selected to start
from physical ignition signal or from the filtered ignition signal based on configurable
parameter: Ignition filter source for starting Driver Authentication time calculations
(address 0, bit 4).
The following diagrams describe typical authentication scenarios:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 158 of 237

Ignition
State Ignition On

Maximum Time without

Authentication
Dallas Key
Presented

Driver Authentication Event

sent

Authentication
Reminder

Scenario 1: Driver authenticated

Ignition
State Ignition On

Maximum Time without Authentication

Dallas Key
Presented

Driving without
Authentication Event sent

Authentication
Reminder

Scenario 2: Driver not Authenticated

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 159 of 237

Ignition
Ignition Off
State

Time to Authentication loss

Forget last Dallas key

Immobilizer
Activate Immobilizer

Scenario 3: Erase Dallas key after Ignition Off

8.5.1 Enable Driving Without Authentication Alert

Address: 123, bit 0 for event

484, bit 0 for distress
Description: If this bit is enabled, the unit will generate an alert of Driving without
Authentication in case a Dallas key was not detected before an expiration of Maximum
Time without Authentication timeout.
Default value: Event enabled (1), Distress disabled (0)

8.5.2 Enable Authentication Updated Alert

Address: 123, bit 1 for event

484, bit 1 for distress
Description: If this bit is enabled, the unit will generate an Authentication updated
alert upon new Dallas key detection (this update can be limited to pre-programmed Dallas
keys only, see the parameter below).
Default value: Event enabled (1), Distress disabled (0)

8.5.3 Maximum Time without Authentication

Address: 111
Description: This parameter stores the value of maximum allowed time between Start
Event and transmission of message with transmission reason Driving without
authentication, in case the Dallas key was not detected.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 160 of 237

If any Dallas key detected during the time period defined in this parameter, the unit will
send a message with new Dallas code and transmission reason Driver Authenticated (it
is also possible to deliver Driver ID Updated report only in case the iButton code fit one of
the programmed values).
Value resolution: 30 seconds
Span: 0 -255 (=0-127.5 minutes)
Default value: 2 (=1 minute)

8.5.4 Enable Authentication Reminder Feedback Output Activation

Address: 123, bit 4

Description: If "Enable Authentication Reminder Output Activation" bit is enabled (see
below) the unit will activate feedback output/s from Ignition On detection (after filter
defined by the "Ignition Filter Source for Starting Driver Authentication Time Calculations"
parameter) until one of the tree conditions below will come true:

Timeout defined by "Maximum Time without Authentication" parameter will expire

Any (or pre-programmed as per configuration bit below) Dallas code will be received

Ignition will be switched off

Default value: 1 - enable

8.5.5 Ignition Filter Source for Starting Driver Authentication Time

Calculations

Address: 0, bit 4
Description: This parameter defines a start point for timeouts for:

Reminder Feedback Output Activation (Ignition On)

Time to Authentication loss (Ignition Off, next parameter)

Timeout to Driving Without Authentication Event (Ignition On)

The 2 options are:

0 - Ignition ON/OFF filter + Inputs filter)

1 - Inputs filter only

Default value: 0

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 161 of 237

8.5.6 Time to Authentication Loss

Address: 112
Description: This parameter stores a time period, during which the unit will keep a last
detected Dallas Code after the Stop Event.
After this period of time the Dallas Code will be erased from units memory and in every
outgoing transmission from the unit Authentication code will be sent as 0.
If during the time period, defined in this parameter, will be detected Start event the
unit will keep sending last detected Dallas key (until Stop event) in every outgoing
message.
If Immobilizer Activation enabled (see next parameter) this timer defines how long after
Stop event the Standard Immobilizer output (pin 7) will be activated.
Resolution: 0.5 minutes/bit
Data span: 0-255 (max value 127.5 minutes)
Default value: 1 (30 seconds)

8.5.7 Activate Immobilizer while no active Dallas

Address: 1, bit 5
Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will activate its Standard Immobilizer output
(pin 7) from Authentication loss after Stop event (see previous parameter) until the driver
authorizes itself using Dallas Key (any Dallas key or known Dallas key, as per the Enable
Pre-defined driver IDs list configuration bit).
NOTES:

This flag is only applicable to fleet edition of Cello and will not work in a security
variant.

If this flag is set (enabled), the Standard Immobilizer output (pin 7) will be
automatically activated immediately after SW reset or Power Recycle.

In CR300 devices, the immobilizer output can be switched to one of the available
device output pins ("Blinkers", "LEDs") using the configurable option located in
address 506. The selected output will maintain the same reset behavior a described
in note 2 above.
Default value: 0 - disabled

8.5.8 Enable Conditional Activation of Immobilizer

Address 0, bit 2

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 162 of 237

Description: If this bit is enabled (1), the unit will only perform self activation of
Immobilizer output while both conditions listed below are fulfilled:

An appropriate legacy logical condition is detected (No Driver ID in the memory,

Towing detection, reminder etc)

High signal detected on the ignition input.

Immobilizer output will be switched off immediately after one of the above conditions is
not present.
If this bit is disabled (0), immobilizer output is activated independently from the status of
an Ignition input.
NOTE: This bit is only affecting self activation of the output. Activation by command
(OTA or Serial) is still unconditional and independent from the status of an Ignition input.
Only the additional OTA/serial command or detection of Authorized Dallas switches off an
output activated by command.
Default: disabled (0)

8.5.9 Enable Pre-defined Driver IDs List

Address: 123, bit 2

Description: If this bit is set the unit will compare received Dallas with the pre-
programmed list and will act accordingly. In case of reception of unknown code the unit
WILL NOT do the following:

Unblock Immobilizer (If Immobilizer Activation enabled)

Indicate Dallas reception by Feedback beep

Deactivate Driver ID reminder feedback outputs (if Enable Authentication Reminder

Output Activation enabled)

Send New Driver ID message

Record the unknown Dallas code as latest Driver ID

If valid Dallas is not received during the timeout, programmed in Maximum time without
authentication the unit will send Driving without ID message, as it would do if no
Dallas is received at all.
Default value: 0 - disabled

8.5.10 Enable Dallas ID Updated Event even if it is not in the List

Address: 123, bit 3

Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate a Driver Authentication Update event
(TR 46) upon Dallas key detection even if it is not in the pre-programmed list. The foreign
(code not in the list) Dallas code is reported in every message type 0, but the unit:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 163 of 237

Will not Unblock Immobilizer

Will not Indicate Dallas reception by Feedback beep
Will not Deactivate Driver ID reminder feedback outputs
Default Value: 0 - disabled

8.5.11 iButton Codes (30 Buttons)

Address: 429 to 446 (first 3 buttons codes),

1448 to 1609 (last 27 buttons)
Description: This section of the memory contains the identification data for 30 Dallas
iButtons.
Data format: Each button is assigned with 6 ID bytes. The data of these 6 bytes is
printed on the surface of the button, where every pair of hexadecimal digits is equivalent
to one byte.
Valid values: The data must exactly match the buttons data, or they would not work.
Default Value: All zeroes

8.5.12 Enable Feedback upon Authentication

Address: 123, bit 5

Description: If enabled, the unit will activate pulse on the output/s programmed as the
System Feedbacks when new Dallas code is detected. The pulse will be activated for a
time, defined in an Outputs Pulse Width parameter (addr. 140 dec).
Default Value: Zero (disabled)

8.5.13 Enable Resending "Driver Authentication" Alert upon each

Detection

Address: 123, bit 6

Description: If this bit is set the "Driver Authentication Update" event (TR 46) will be
generated every time when a Dallas key is attached to the reader (even if it has the same
code as last attached Dallas). Removing Dallas key for 1 second at least from the holder
will cause the unit to threat the Dallas as removed and the next attachment of the same
Dallas will cause new event generation.
Default Value: 0- disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 164 of 237

8.5.14 Enable Dallas Bus Mode (1-Wire) Bus

Address: 123, bit 7

Description: If this bit is cleared the Cello unit will start acting as 1-Wire Bus master
managing multiple 1-Wire slaves. If this bit is set the Cello unit will retain its legacy
behavior communicating with single slave 1-Wire device.
Default Value: 1 - Dallas in Point to point mode (Bus mode disabled)

8.5.15 Enable Infinite Driver Notifications when Driver is not Identified

Address: 0, bit 1
Description: If this bit is set, Driver Authentication Reminder will be generated
indefinitely overriding the timeout defined in: Timeout of Driver Authentication
Reminder.
Default Value: 0 - Legacy Driver Authentication Alert period

8.5.16 Enable Driver ID Card Removed Event

Address: 526, bit 4

Description: This parameter enables sending Driver ID Card Removed event (TR 46, STR
2), whenever the driver removes the card from the reader, regardless of the ignition
signal state.
Note: this feature is available only if "Enable Dallas bus mode" parameter (address 123,
bit 7) is set to 1 (Disable)
Range: 0 Disable, 1 - Enable
Default Value: 0 Disable

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 165 of 237

8.6 Extended Driver Authentication

8.6.1 Enable Differentiation between Driver and Passenger

Address: 1349, bit 4

Description: If this is enabled (0), the unit will change the standard Driver ID
management logic (every new code automatically replacing a previous one) by an
extended logic of Driver/Passenger management as described below.
Default: 1 - Disable

8.6.1.1 Driver Identification

The User ID is considered "Driver ID" if received when there is no Dallas code in the RAM
(both in Ignition on and Ignition off mode).
Driver ID is treated by the unit similarly to the legacy Dallas ID (unique 48 bit iButton
identifier), except for the following:

Different code received (new iButton attached) while there is a Driver ID in the RAM:
In ignition on: will be treated as "Passenger ID" (see below) and will not erase the
existing Driver ID from RAM
In ignition off : will be ignored

If received code is identical to the active Driver ID in RAM it will be ignored

The last bit of STR (in OTA alert, message type 0) contains status of Group ID
recognition ("1" authenticated, "0" not authenticated)

The first bit of STR (in OTA alert, message type 0) contains "0" (indicating "Driver
ID")
If differentiation between the driver and the passenger (1 in this bit) is not enabled in
the programming the unit is using the Legacy Driver ID algorithms.

8.6.1.2 Passenger Identification

The passenger identification only works when differentiation between the driver and the
passenger is enabled in the programming.
The User ID is considered "Passenger ID" if:

Received in Ignition On mode

Received while there is an active Driver ID code in the RAM

Reception of "Passenger ID" causes the unit to generate a "Driver Authentication Update"
event (TR46), containing received code in Dallas bytes of Msg type 0, while the STR
Specific byte contains:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 166 of 237

The last bit of TR Specific byte shall contains status of Group ID recognition ("1"
recognized, "0" not recognized), see below.

The first bit of TR Specific byte contains "1" (indicating "Passenger ID")
Received "Passenger ID" is NOT replacing active Driver ID in the RAM. Once "Driver
Authentication Update" event/distress is generated, the Passenger ID code is "forgotten".

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 167 of 237

8.6.1.3 Driver/Passenger/Group Management Flow Chart

Dallas Code
received

No Is extended
support of DS1971
enabled?

Does the number

Yes Read 256bit begins with 0xA
EEPROM and the CS No
matches?
Legacy 01h Is the family code
behaviour using Read the ID (33h) 1
01h or 14h? 14h
the ID (33h)
Split into ID and Yes
group ID
Set Group ID to
9999
Set ID to the 6
bytes iButton ID
(33h)
Yes Does Group ID
fit?

Set Group ID
Authorized bit No
Reset Group ID
Authorized bit
Disarm Immobilizer

No Yes Is there Dallas No

Ignore Is Ignition On? Set Driver ID bit
code in RAM

Yes
Use ID as Driver
Set passenger ID ID (record as
bit active code in
Yes Is the received No RAM)
code identical to
the one in RAM Transmit new code
once & forget (Do not Consider
record as active code Feedback,
in RAM) Immobilizer, Event
generation and
Reminder
Consider Feedback
features,
activation
implemented in
the standard
Restore Driver ID codebase
bit

End

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 168 of 237

8.7 Trailer Connection Monitoring

The purpose of this feature is to enable detection and reporting of connection and
disconnection of a trailer to the track.
The trailer is equipped by identification device, connected to a 1-Wire bus port of
Cellocator unit. Once the trailer is connected, its identification device is continually
transmitting its Dallas ID.
The family of Dallas device used by the trailer is programmed in configuration. If such a
device is attached longer than the configurable timeout, the unit is assuming connection
of the trailer and vice versa (if disconnected longer than the configurable timeout, the
unit is assuming disconnection).
Limitations:

Only one trailer can be used at a time.

If two or more devices from the trailers Dallas family are concurrently and continually
attached to the bus, reliable trailer detection is not guaranteed.

If second device from the trailers Dallas family is attached while trailer is already
detected, this second device will be immediately considered as Driver/Passenger.
Upon trailer connection (expiration of a Timeout for Trailer Connection status change)
the unit will raise Bit 1 of Byte 41 in every outbound OTA msg type 0 to indicate that the
Trailer is connected.
Upon trailer disconnection the unit shall reset Bit 1 of Byte 41 in every outbound OTA msg
type 0 to indicate that the Trailer is disconnected.
It is possible to query trailer ID by OTA command (Command Code 0x16).
NOTES:

Trailer ID is never reported in other message types except message with TR199 and
31 (Reply to command, if Trailer ID was requested).

This feature requires the Dallas bus to be enabled Enable Dallas Bus (singleWire)

8.7.1 Dallas Family of Trailer Identifier

Address: 2393
Description: The following parameter contains Dallas family ID of the Trailer identifier.
If the device with selected family ID will be attached to the bus longer than programmed
in the Timeout for Trailer Connection status change parameter - it will be considered as
Trailer.
If the device with selected family ID will be attached to the bus for less than programmed
in Timeout for Trailer Connection status change parameter - it will be considered as
Driver/Passenger, while the corresponding reaction (event/feedback) will be issued upon
disconnection from the iButton.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 169 of 237

Zero value in this parameter disables Trailer connection detection.

NOTE: This feature requires the Dallas bus to be enabled Enable Dallas Bus Mode
(singleWire)
Default value: 01h (iButton DS1990A)

8.7.2 Enable Trailer Connection Event

Address: 1349, bit 5

Description: If this bit is set (1) the unit will issue a dedicated event when the Dallas ID
of the Trailers family is continually connected (or disconnected) for longer that
programmed in the Timeout for Trailer Connection status event parameter.
The event will contain transmission reason 199 (Trailer connection status change), and
specific transmission reason (STR) 0 for trailer disconnected, 1 for trailer connected.
In both cases:

Bits 4-5 of byte 10 (OTA Msg type 0) contain value of 0b11 (Trailer ID)

Bytes 33-38 of OTA Msg type 0 with TR199 contain the ID of Trailer Identification
device.
Default value: 0 - disabled

8.7.3 Trailer Connection Distress

Address: 1349, bit 6

Description: If this bit is set (1) the unit will issue a dedicated distress when the Dallas
ID of the Trailers family is continually connected (or disconnected) for longer that
programmed in the Timeout for Trailer Connection status event parameter.
The distress will contain transmission reason 199 (Trailer connection status change), and
specific transmission reason (STR) 0 for trailer disconnected, 1 for trailer connected.
In both cases:

Bits 4-5 of byte 10 (OTA Msg type 0) contain value of 0b11 (Trailer ID)

Bytes 33-38 of OTA Msg type 0 with TR199 contain the ID of Trailer Identification
device.
Default value: 0 - disabled

8.7.4 Timeout for Trailer Connection Status Change

Address: 2392

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 170 of 237

Description: This parameter stores time period (in seconds) of continuous connection
(or disconnection) of the Dallas button (of family programmed in Dallas Family of Trailer
Identifier parameter), used for triggering corresponding event or distress.
Default value: 15

8.7.5 Trailer Connected: Over Speed Start Velocity threshold

Address: 261
Description: The unit can apply different velocity thresholds for Over Speed session
start and end when trailer is connected.
This parameter stores velocity threshold (in 32 cm/sec/bit) used for Over Speeding
session start when trailer is connected.
If over speed session started by violating Trailer connected over speeding start
threshold, it will be ended by reaching Trailer connected over speeding end velocity
threshold, even if the trailer disconnected between those two events.
NOTE: If both the Trailer mode and Input dependent Over Speed modes are active
concurrently the unit will select the lowest speed threshold out of two.
Resolution: 32 cm/sec/bit
Default value: 0 cm/sec

8.7.6 Trailer Connected: Over Speed End Velocity Threshold

Address: 262
Description: The unit can apply different velocity thresholds for Over Speed session
start and end when trailer is connected.
This parameter stores velocity threshold (in 32 cm/sec/bit) used for Over Speeding
session end when trailer is disconnected.
If over speed session started by violating Trailer connected over speeding start
threshold, it will be ended by reaching Trailer connected over speeding end velocity
threshold, even if the trailer disconnected between those two events.
NOTE: If both the Trailer mode and Input dependent Over Speed modes are active
concurrently the unit will select the lowest speed threshold out of two.
Resolution: 32 cm/sec/bit
Default value: 0 cm/sec

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 171 of 237

8.8 Driver Behaviour

8.8.1 Behavior Violation Indications to Driver

The unit is supporting up to two feedback signals (visual and audible) for the following
driver behavior violations:

Over Speed

Coasting

Harsh Breaking

Harsh Acceleration

Sudden course change.

Idle speed

Excessive RPM
All above listed violations are spitted into 2 groups of continuous violations and
momentary violations.
Each group of violations can be escorted by template of indication to driver on two
assigned outputs as per configuration.
For continuous violations (over-speed, coasting and idle-speed) the activation only occurs
upon session start.
Violation to Idle-speed is an exception: in spite of being continuous violation, Idle-speed
is assigned by indication of momentary violation template.
Any combination of up to 2 outputs assigned for driver behavior is legal.
When single output is used as a feedback for two events, and those 2 events are
simultaneously pending, a predefined hard coded pattern will be activated till
simultaneous condition ends.
In case more than one feedback is activated simultaneously on the same output a special
hard coded pattern will dominate the output till there are no more simultaneous events.

Feedback
1

Feedback
2

Output
Special pattern reflecting
Simultaneous feedbacks
The special hardcoded feedback will be 250mSec On and 250mSec Off.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 172 of 237

Interaction with other Output Activation mechanisms

The priority of the output activation upon over-speeding violation is the same as a priority
of feedback, i.e. the lowest.
Any other output activation (manual activation, jamming, etc) has stronger priority and
will take control over the selected output when needed.

8.8.1.1 Feedback for Driver Behavior Violations Bitmask

Address: 2376
Bit 6 Excessive RPM (According to Continuous violation template)
Bit 5 Idle Speed (According to Momentary violation template)
Bit 4 - Sudden course change (According to Momentary violation template)
Bit 3 - Harsh Acceleration (According to Momentary violation template)
Bit 2 - Harsh Breaking (According to Momentary violation template)
Bit 1 Coasting (According to Continuous violation template)
Bit 0 - Over Speed (irrespectively to the source of threshold, according to Continuous
violation template). This bit must be also enabled for Speed Limiting GeoFence feature.
The unit will trigger feedback upon detection of an appropriate driver behavior violation if
this violation is enabled (1) in this bitmask.
The feedback will be triggered upon violation of the logical conditions, irrespectively to
the generation (or not generation) of event/distress for the corresponding violation.
Default: 0xFF

8.8.1.2 Duration of Output Activation, upon Momentary Driver Behavior Violation

Detection
Addresses: 523, bits 3-5
524, bits 3-5
Description: This field contains the duration of the output activation upon momentary
driver behavior violation detection.
Zero - forbidden.
Resolution: 0.5 seconds/bit
Default: (1) 0.5 seconds

8.8.1.3 Number of Output Activation Repetitions upon Momentary Driver

Behavior Violation Detection
Addresses: 523, bits 6-7
524, bits 6-7

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 173 of 237

Description: This field contains the number of the output activation repetitions (Duty
cycle 50%) upon momentary driver behavior violation detection.
Zero - forbidden.
Default: (1) Continuous repetition

8.8.1.4 Output, Auto-activated upon Continuous Driver Behavior Violation

Detection
Address: 2377 for first output and 2380 for second output, bits 0-2
Description: This pair of parameters defines a numbers of outputs that will be activated
upon driver behavior violation.

Outputs name Outputs number

Feature Disabled 0

Siren 1

Gradual Stop 2

St. Immobilizer 3

LED 4

Blinkers 5

CFE Out 1 6

CFE Out 2 7

Value span: 1to 5

Default value: zero

8.8.1.5 Output Activation Pattern (upon Continuous Driver Behavior Violation)

Address: 2377 for first output and 2380 for second output, bits 3-5
Description: This pair of parameters defines a activation pattern of outputs upon
detection of Driver behavior violation.

Setting Action

0 Pulse Activation (The output shall be activated for the time, defined in
"Pulse Outputs Width Period", addr. 140 dec

1-3 Reserved

4 Template Activation (according to the settings described below)

5 Warning of delayed violation registration

(template activation - according to the settings described below)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 174 of 237

NOTE: If user configures at first feedback according to Warning of

delayed violation registration pattern and at second feedback
according to "Template Activation pattern the unit will function
according to Warning of delayed violation registration pattern.

6-7 Reserved

Default: (0) Pulse Activation

Template of continuous Output Activation upon detection of driver behavior

violation
Example of template: Two activations in a session, 1 second for each activation, 2
sessions, 3 seconds between sessions:

Warning of delayed violation registration

This option is only applicable for continuous driver behavior violations: coasting, Over-
speed and Excessive RPM.
If this option is selected, upon driver behavior violation detections the unit does the
following:

It does NOT generate an event immediately.

It activates selected output (after expiration of OverSpeed or Coasting filter)

according to a template definition on addresses 2377-2379 (for the first output) and
2380-2382 (for the second output).
The output shall be deactivated when one (of two) conditions come true:

The end of violation

The violation lasts longer than the time defined in Driver behavior- continuous
violation feedback Logic: Feedback Violation Deactivation time threshold .

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 175 of 237

NOTE: The event shall only be generated if the violation lasts longer than 10 seconds.
The warnings will be triggered only after the programmable filters of coasting and over-
speeding
Outputs will be deactivated immediately when the condition will become not true or after
10 seconds (without the programmable filter).

8.8.1.6 Continuous Driver Behavior Violation - Output Activation Template

Activation Length
Address: 2378 for first output and 2381 for second output, bits 0-3
Description: This pair of parameters defines a length of activation of the selected output
upon Driver behavior violation detection.
0 for the time, defined in "Pulse Outputs Width Period", addr. 140 dec.
Note that the duty cycle of activation is 50%, i.e. activation time is the same as off time.

Value resolution: 0.5 second

Default value: 1(0.5 seconds)

8.8.1.7 Continuous Driver Behavior Violation - Output Activation Template:

Number of Activations in a Session
Address: 2378 for first output and 2381 for second output, bits 4-7
Description: This pair of parameters defines a number of activations of the selected
output upon Driver behavior violation detection.
0 cancels outputs activation upon driver behavior violation detection.
Default value: 3

8.8.1.8 Continuous Driver Behavior Violation - Output Activation Template:

Number of Activation Sessions
Address: 2379 for first output and 2382 for second output, bits 0-3
Description: This pair of parameters defines a number of sessions of output activations
upon Driver behavior violation detection.
0 cancels outputs activation upon driver behavior violation detection.
Default value: 1

8.8.1.9 Continuous Driver Behavior Violation - Output Activation Template: Time

between the Activation Sessions
Address: 2379 for first output and 2382 for second output, bits 4-7
Description: This pair of parameters defines a time between activation sessions of
output activations upon Driver behavior violation detection.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 176 of 237

Zero value. If zero is programmed the unit will only perform one session of activation
irrespectively to the programmed number of sessions.
Value resolution: 0.5 second
Default value: 2 (1 second)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 177 of 237

9 Inputs Events
The Cellocator unit provides 6 inputs; the hardware of all those inputs varies from pulled
up, pulled down, wet (not equipped by pull up/down resistor) or adapted for frequency
measurement. Each input is equipped by a packet of legacy functions:

Trigger on the input cause generation of an event with an appropriate transmission

reason

Two inputs allow analog signal measurement

Same two inputs allow frequency measurement

Some affect unit's logic (like Ignition and door)

Each input (except ignition) is equipped by a configuration field, enabling to set up its
type and other attributes, like threshold, differentiating between logical 0 and logical 1.

Input Entry Type

Door Analog / discrete "wet" and "dry" contact, Frequency

Counter

Shock Analog / discrete"wet" and "dry" contact, Frequency counter

Panic Discrete only, "dry" contact

Unlock Discrete only, "dry" contact

Lock Discrete only, "dry" contact

When configured as discrete input ("dry" or "wet") the table below defines the range of
voltage threshold for logical zero detection.

Wet (no internal pulling resistor) Dry (Internally pulled up)

Min Defaults Max Min Defaults Max

allowed allowed allowed allowed

Value in Volts (Programmed Value)

Shock 0V (0) 14.7V 30V (255) 0.2v (57) 1V (125) 1.45v

(125) (160)

Door 0V (0) 14.7V 30V (255) 0.2v (57) 1V (125) 1.45v

(125) (160)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 178 of 237

Wet (no internal pulling resistor) Dry (Internally pulled up)

Lock9 0.2v (57) 1.85V 2.36v

(200) (240)
N/A
Unlock 0.2v (57) 1.85V 2.36v
(200) (240)

Panic 0.2v (57) 1.85V 2.36v

(200) (240)

The table below provides threshold translation from the programmed value into voltage
on interface pin (Measurement error 20mv).

Threshold Corresponding Threshold Corresponding

Value at PL voltage on Value at PL voltage on
file Door and file Lock/Unlock/Distress
Shock inputs

0-56 1.00v (in range 0-56 1.85v (in range value

value protection)
protection)

57 0.20v 57 0.20v

80 0.47v 80 0.47v

100 0.71v 100 0.69v

125 1.00v 125 1.00v

140 1.19v 140 1.15v

160 1.45v 160 1.39v

161-255 1.00v (in range 200 1.87v

value
protection)

204 1.91v

232 2.26v

240 2.37v

9
The provided values are valid for Cello hardware A04 and above. If you own older hardware please contact our technical support for further information
concerning the highest possible zero detection value.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 179 of 237

244-255 1.85v (in range value

protection)

9.1 4 Ignition (Not Supported by CelloTrack)

Ignition input can be used for detection of journey Start and Stop, which are key events
in unit logic and require an especial treatment, or as a general purpose input (when
journey Start/Stop is detected using an accelerometer).
Journey Start and Stop:
The system will enter hibernation mode between Journey Stop and Journey Start, and will
start generating periodical events between Journey Start and Journey Stop
In case it is used for detection of journey Start and Stop, except "Common Discrete
Inputs Time Filter" applied to every input, the Start/Stop Alert Generation Time Filters are
applied as well.
A general purpose input:
If ignition input is used as a general purpose it is internally pulled down and can recognize
the following signals:

Low (logical zero) 0V<Vin<3.5V

High: Vin>9V
Voltages between 3.5V to 9V are undefined.

9.1.1 Reporting Journey Start

Address: 126, bit 5 for event
130, bit 5 for distress
488, bit 5 for HRLS
Description: if this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon Journey
Start detection (by ignition or by accelerometer).
Default Value: Event enabled (1), Distress and HRLS disabled (0(

9.1.2 Reporting Journey Stop

Address: 124, bit 5 for event
128, bit 5 for distress
486, bit 5 for HRLS
Description: if this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon Journey
Stop detection (by ignition or by accelerometer).
Default Value: Event enabled (1), Distress and HRLS disabled (0(

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 180 of 237

9.1.3 Inverting Journey Start/Stop

Address: 100, bit 5
Description:
Once inverted:
The system will report Journey Start when low level (by ignition or by accelerometer) is
recognized and vice versa.
Default Value: (0) not inverted

9.1.4 Reporting Signal Falling on Ignition

Address: 125, bit 7 for event
129, bit 7 for distress
487, bit 7 for HRLS
Description: if this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection
of logical level falling from 1 to 0. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of
the alert upon disconnection of this input from (-).
Note: This feature will not work when CFE configuration is used.
Default Value: zeros disabled (0(

9.1.5 Reporting Signal Rising on Ignition

Address: 127, bit 7 for event
131, bit 7 for distress
489, bit 7 for HRLS
Description: if this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection
of logical level rising from 0 to 1. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of
the alert upon connection of this input to (-).
Note: This feature will not work when CFE configuration is used.
Default Value: zero disabled (0(

9.1.6 Inverting Ignition Input

Address: 101, bit 6
Description: Ignition input is internally pulled down and therefore does not require an
inversion in most of the cases.
In case it is serving as a GP and logical levels are opposite to physical levels the input
shall be inverted.
Default Value: (0) not inverted

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 181 of 237

9.2 5 Lock
This input is equipped by an internal pull up resistor and therefore can only serve as
discrete dry contact.

9.2.1 Function Assigned to Lock Input

Address 1706, bits 0-4
Description: This field enables assignation of certain functionality to a Lock input.

Function Description
number

0 Use as a GP input (default)

1-8 Reserved

9 Volume Up (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

10 Volume Down (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

11 Reserved

12 Over-speed threshold control

If this function is selected, the unit will automatically use speed threshold
programmed on address 2391 as both Over-speed start and Over-speed
end thresholds while this input is triggered.

13-31 Reserved

Default Value: zero GP input

9.2.2 Inverting Lock Input

Address: 101, bit 2

Description: Lock input is pulled up (internally); therefore it does require an inversion
when it is required to detect activation by low level (-).
Once inverted: the "low" level of signal (below threshold programmed in parameter
below) on this input will be treated as logical "1" (active). The "high" level of signal, as
well as floating state, on this input will be treated as logical "0" (not active).
Default Value: (1) inverted

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 182 of 237

9.2.3 Threshold for Lock Input

Address: 1707
Description: This threshold defines the highest voltage on this input, which will still be
considered as logical zero. Any voltage above the value programmed in this parameter
(as well as open contact) will be considered as logical "one".
The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input and comparing the average
measurement (refer to parameter below) with the threshold programmed in this
parameter.
Value span: 57 (0.2V) to 240 (2.36V). Any measured value below 57 or above 240
causes the unit to convert this value to default (200).
Default Value: 200 (1.85V)

9.2.4 Averaging Factor for Lock Input

Address: 1708
Description: The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input every 10 msec. The
moving average of sample's number (preprogrammed in this parameter) is compared
with the threshold (previous parameter) in order to decide concerning the logical level of
the input.
NOTE: In the operational modes listed below the unit is ignoring averaging factor and
processing each measurement sample separately:

In Full Hibernation mode, including the Modem / GPS On Time

In Signal Correlation Mode (applicable in security builds only)

Default Value: 10 samples

9.2.5 Reporting Signal Falling on Lock

Address: 125, bit 2 for event

129, bit 2 for distress
487, bit 2 for HRLS
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection
of logical level falling from 1 to 0. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of
the alert upon disconnection of this input from (-).
Default Value: zeros disabled (0(

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 183 of 237

9.2.6 Reporting Signal Rising on Lock

Address: 127, bit 2 for event

131, bit 2 for distress
489, bit 2 for HRLS
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection
of logical level rising from 0 to 1. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of
the alert upon connection of this input to (-).
Default Value: zero disabled (0(

9.3 11- Unlock

This input is equipped by an internal pull up resistor and therefore can only serve as
discrete dry contact.

9.3.1 Function Assigned to Unlock Input

Address 1703, bits 0-4

Name in Programmer: Assigned Function
Description: This field enables assignation of certain functionality to a Unlock input.

Function Description Comment

number

0 Use as a GP input (default)

1-8 Reserved

9 Volume Up (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

10 Volume Down (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

11 Reserved

12 Over-speed threshold control

If this function is selected, the unit will automatically use speed threshold
programmed on address 2391 as both Over-speed start and Over-speed
end thresholds while this input is triggered.

13-31 Reserved

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 184 of 237

Default Value: zero GP input

9.3.2 Inverting Unlock Input

Address: 100, bit 7

Description: Unlock input is pulled up (internally); therefore it does require an inversion
when it is required to detect activation by low level (-).
Once inverted: the "low" level of signal (below threshold programmed in parameter
above) on this input will be treated as logical "1" (active). The "high" level of signal, as
well as "not connected" state, on this input will be treated as logical "0" (not active).
Default Value: (1) inverted

9.3.3 Threshold for Unlock Input

Address: 1704
Description: This threshold defines the highest voltage on this input, which will still be
considered as logical zero. Any voltage above the value programmed in this parameter
(as well as open contact) will be considered as logical "one".
The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input and comparing the average
measurement (refer to parameter below) with the threshold programmed in this
parameter.
Value span: 57 (0.2V) to 240 (2.36V). Any measured value below 57 or above 240
causes the unit to convert this value to default (200).
Default Value: 200 (1.85V)

9.3.4 Averaging Factor for Unlock Input

Address: 1705
Description: The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input every 10 msec. The
moving average of sample's number (preprogrammed in this parameter) is compared
with the threshold (previous parameter) in order to decide concerning the logical level of
the input.
NOTE: In the operational modes listed below the unit is ignoring averaging factor and
processing each measurement sample separately:

In Full Hibernation mode, including the Modem/GPS On Time

In Signal Correlation Mode (applicable in security builds only)

Default Value: 10 samples

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 185 of 237

9.3.5 Reporting Signal Falling on Unlock

Address: 124, bit 7 for event

128, bit 7 for distress
486, bit 7 for HRLS
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection
of logical level falling from 1 to 0. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of
the alert upon disconnection of this input from (-).
Default Value: zeros disabled (0(

9.3.6 Reporting Signal Rising on Unlock

Address: 126, bit 7 for event

130, bit 7 for distress
488, bit 7 for HRLS
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection
of logical level rising from 0 to 1. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of
the alert upon connection of this input to (-).
Default Value: zero disabled (0(

9.4 14 Door

9.4.1 Door Input Type

Address 1674, bits 5-7

Description: This input is equipped by pair of internal resistors, which can be
programmatically turned into pull up, pull down or canceled at all. Therefore the input can
serve as digital or analog input of the types described below as well as a frequency
counter

Input Type Description

number

0 Discrete Dry Contact (on board pull-up)

1 Discrete Normal (Wet Input)

2 Analog Backward Compatible (0-2.5V)

3 Analog New Range (0-30V)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 186 of 237

4 Frequency meter

5 Pulse Counter: Enables Pulse Counting mechanism

6-7 Reserved

Default Value: zero - Discrete Dry Contact

9.4.2 Function Assigned to Door Input

Address 1674, bits 0-4

Description: This field enables assignation of certain functionality to a Door input.

Function Description Comment

number

0 Use as a GP input (default)

1 Use as a GP frequency meter (refer to frequency Only compatible to

metering section in this document) Type 4 (Frequency
meter)
2 Use as a Speed source (refer to frequency
metering section in this document)

3 Use as a Fuel Level source (refer to frequency

metering section in this document)

4-8 Reserved

9 Volume Up (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

10 Volume Down (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

11 Reserved

12 Over-speed threshold control

If this function is selected, the unit will automatically use speed threshold
programmed on address 2391 as both Over-speed start and Over-speed
end thresholds while this input is triggered.

13-31 Reserved

Note: For utilizing this input as fuel level source (or fuel consumption estimation based on
the fuel level), a fuel probe need to be connected to the input, this parameter need to be
set to "Use as a Fuel Level source" (3), and any CAN configuration for fuel level (or fuel
consumption estimation) need to be disabled.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 187 of 237

Default Value: zero GP input

9.4.3 Scaling Factor for Frequency Report on Door Input

Address: 1675-1676
Name in Programmer: Scaling Factor Frequency
Description: Applicable only if door is selected as input type 4. The scaling factor is
intended to be used for conversion of the measured frequency into common unit of speed
(cm/sec) in case the measurement is utilized as a speed source or into any other
common format, if the input is used as a GP pulse frequency counter.
NOTE: This value may be calculated and programmed by the unit automatically during
the Auto-Calibration Process. (Refer to the Frequency Metering Section in this document)

Stored value of Scaling Factor (Sf * 1000)

First Configuration Byte (MSB) Second configuration byte (LSB)

In case of Speed Source (Input's type 4, Assigned function 2):

The value utilized as a speed [cm/sec] will be calculated as follows:
= []
S Momentary value of speed [cm/sec]
Fs Measured frequency
Sf scaling factor
(The scaling factor is stored as follows: Sf=stored value/1000).
NOTE: In this case the scaling factor is given by the specific vehicle and actually
translating number of pulses into a speed (in cm/sec).
Example:
When calibrating a vehicle at 40 Km/h (1111cm/sec), the index obtained is 54 (that is, 54
pulses per second). When the measured value is 108 pulses, it means that the vehicle is
running at 80 Km/h (2222cm/sec).
In this case the scaling factor will be Sf=1111 /54=20.576.
Maximum value of a scaling factor of speed is Sf=65.535.
The stored value of Sf will be 65535.

In case of GP pulse frequency counter (Input's type 4, Assigned function 1):

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 188 of 237

The scaled value of the measurement will be reported in every position update from the
unit in one of the Analog Inputs monitoring bytes, as per the configuration described
above in this document.
The scaling factor, similarly to the previous case, is stored as follows:
Sf=stored value/1000

NOTE: Unlike the previous case the scaling factor here is a variable, adapted by the user
to report the measured frequency value with best possible resolution in one byte.

Example:
Assuming the GP Pulse Frequency input is used to measure the engine speed (in RPM);
When calibrating a vehicle at 2000 RPM, the measured value is 116 (that is, 116 pulses
per second). When the system receives 232 pulses it means that the vehicle is running at
4000 RPM.
If maximum available engine speed is 8kRPM, let's set a resolution of 32RPM/Bit
(8000/255) in order to be able to report the measured value in single byte.
In our example we measure 2000/116=17.24 RPM/bit. Using simple proportion lets
calculate the scaling factor:
Sf=17.24/32=0.53875
(stored value will be 0539)
The value reported in OTA message type 0 will be therefore:
= [/]
Es reported value of engine speed [32RPM/Bit]
Fs Measured frequency
Sf scaling factor

9.4.4 Thresholds on Door as a General Purpose Frequency Counter

Address: 1678-1681
Description: This parameter defines minimum, maximum or range (as per the
configuration byte) thresholds for frequency measurement on Door GP Frequency
measurement input. Upon violation of this threshold for longer than the pre-programmed
period, the unit will generate an appropriate OTA msg type 0, with dedicated transmission
reason (192 dec).
NOTE: The threshold is applied on the result after scaling and not on the measured value
(Es [RPM] in case of Engine Speed measurement).
Each of the thresholds consumes 2 bytes: 1678-1679 for low threshold, 1680-1681 for
high threshold. The threshold is applied on General Purpose Pulse measurement input
only.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 189 of 237

9.4.5 Time Filter for Frequency/Analog Door Input

Address: 1682
Description: (not applicable for discrete or wet types of input)
This parameter defines the violation time before generating a corresponding alert in
100mseconds resolution
Default value: Default value 50 (5 seconds)

9.4.6 Door Freq. Input Violation Type

Address: 1677, bits 0-1

Description: This parameter defines violation type as follows:

0 Threshold 0 Low Threshold

1 High Threshold

1 Range 0 Keep In Range

1 - Keep Out range

Bit 1 Bit 0

Bit 1 defines type of the violation: threshold or range. If threshold type is selected, bits 0
define if the low or high thresholds are processed.
If range type is selected - bit 0 defines if the violating value is inside or outside the range.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 190 of 237

9.4.7 Threshold for Door Input

Address: 1678
Description: Applicable only for discreet types (wet and dry)
This threshold defines the highest voltage on this input, which will still be considered as
logical zero. Any voltage above the value programmed in this parameter (as well as open
contact in case of dry) will be considered as logical "one".
NOTE: The type of input affects the voltage value; the same value will mean different
voltage for wet and discrete types.
The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input and comparing the average
measurement (refer to parameter below) with the threshold programmed in this
parameter.
Value span for wet type: 0 (0V) to 255 (30V)
Default Value: 125 (14.7V)
Value span for discrete type: 57 (0.2V) to 160 (1.45V). Any measured value below 57
or above 160 causes the unit to convert this value to default (125).
Default Value: 125 (1V)

9.4.8 Averaging Factor for Door Input

Address: 1686
Description: The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input every 10 msec. The
moving average of sample's number (preprogrammed in this parameter) is reported to
the application and/or compared with the threshold (previous parameter) in order to
decide concerning the logical level of the input.
NOTE: In Full Hibernation mode the unit is ignoring averaging factor and processing each
measurement sample separately
Default Value: 10 samples

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 191 of 237

9.4.9 Inverting Door Input

Address: 100, bit 0

Description: Inversion is only applicable when the input type is configured as one of the
discrete types.
When set as dry signal, the input is pulled up (internally); therefore it does require an
inversion when it is required to detect activation by low level (-).
Once inverted: the "low" level of signal (below threshold programmed in parameter
above) on this input will be treated as logical "1" (active). The "high" level of signal, as
well as floating state, on this input will be treated as logical "0" (not active).
When set as wet signal type - no inversion is required.
Default Value: (1) inverted

9.4.10 Reporting Signal Falling On Door

Address: 124, bit 0 for event

128, bit 0 for distress
486, bit 0 for HRLS
Description: Only applicable when the input type is configured as one of the discrete
types.
If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection of logical level
falling from 1 to 0. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of the alert upon
disconnection of this input from (-).
Default Value: zeros disabled (0(

9.4.11 Reporting Signal Rising on Door

Address: 126, bit 0 for event

130, bit 0 for distress
488, bit 0 for HRLS
Description: Only applicable when the input type is configured as one of the discrete
types.
If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection of logical level
rising from 0 to 1. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of the alert upon
connection of this input to (-).
Default Value: zeroes disabled (0(

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 192 of 237

9.5 15 Shock

9.5.1 Shock Input Type

Address 1687, bits 5-7

Input Description
Type
number

0 Discrete Dry Contact (on board pull-up)

1 Discrete Normal (Wet Input)

2 Analog Backward Compatible (0-2.5V)

3 Analog New Range (0 30V)

4 Frequency Meter

5 Pulse Counter : Enables Pulse Counting mechanism

6-7 Reserved

Default Value: zero - Discrete Dry Contact

9.5.2 Function Assigned to Shock Input

Address 1687, bits 0-4

Description: This field enables assignation of certain functionality to a Door input.

Function Description Comment

number

0 Use as a GP input (default)

1 Use as a GP frequency meter (refer to frequency

metering section in this document)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 193 of 237

Function Description Comment

number

2 Use as a Speed source (refer to frequency Only compatible to

metering section in this document) Type 4 (Frequency
meter)
3 Use as a Fuel Level source (refer to frequency
metering section in this document)

4-8 Reserved

9 Volume Up (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

10 Volume Down (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

11 Reserved

12 Over-speed threshold control

If this function is selected, the unit will automatically use speed threshold
programmed on address 2391 as both Over-speed start and Over-speed
end thresholds while this input is triggered.

13-31 Reserved

Default Value: zero GP input

9.5.3 Scaling Factor for Frequency Report on Shock Input

Address: 1688-1689
Name in Programmer: Scaling Factor Frequency

Description: Applicable only if shock input is selected as input type 4. The scaling factor
is intended to be used for conversion of the measured frequency into common unit of
speed (cm/sec) in case the measurement is utilized as a speed source or into any other
common format, if the input is used as a GP pulse frequency counter.

Stored value of Scaling Factor (Sf * 1000)

First Configuration Byte (MSB) Second configuration byte (LSB)

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 194 of 237

NOTE: This value may be calculated and programmed by the unit automatically during
the Auto-Calibration Process. (Refer to frequency metering section in this document)
In case of Speed Source (Input's type 4, Assigned function 2):
The value utilized as a speed [cm/sec] will be calculated as follows:
= []
S Momentary value of speed [cm/sec]
Fs Measured frequency
Sf scaling factor
(The scaling factor is stored as follows: Sf=stored value/1000).
NOTE: In this case the scaling factor is given by the specific vehicle and actually
translating number of pulses into a speed (in cm/sec).

Example:
When calibrating a vehicle at 40 Km/h (1111cm/sec), the index obtained is 54 (that is, 54
pulses per second). When the measured value is 108 pulses, it means that the vehicle is
running at 80 Km/h (2222cm/sec).
In this case the scaling factor will be Sf=1111 /54=20.576
Maximum value of an scaling factor of speed is Sf=65.535
The stored value of Sf will be 65535
In case of GP pulse frequency counter (Input's type 4, Assigned function 1):

The scaled value of the measurement will be reported in every position update from
the unit in one of the Analog Inputs monitoring bytes, as per the configuration
described above in this document.

The scaling factor, similarly to the previous case, is stored as follows:

Sf=stored value/1000
NOTE: Unlike the previous case the scaling factor here is a variable, adapted by the user
to report the measured frequency value with best possible resolution in one byte.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 195 of 237

In our example we measure 2000/116=17.24 RPM/bit. Using simple proportion lets

calculate the scaling factor:
Sf=17.24/32=0.53875
(stored value will be 0539)
The value reported in OTA message type 0 will be therefore:
= [/]
Es reported value of engine speed [32RPM/Bit]
Fs Measured frequency
Sf scaling factor

9.5.4 Threshold on Shock as a General Purpose Frequency Counter

Address: 1691-1694
Description: This parameter defines minimum, maximum or range (as per the
configuration byte) thresholds for frequency measurement on Shock GP Frequency
measurement input. Upon violation of this threshold for longer than the pre-programmed
period, the unit will generate an appropriate OTA msg type 0, with dedicated transmission
reason (192 dec).
NOTE: The threshold is applied on the result after scaling and not on the measured value
(Es [RPM] in case of Engine Speed measurement).
Each of the thresholds consumes 2 bytes: 1691-1692 for low threshold, 1693-1694 for
high threshold.
The threshold is applied on General Purpose Pulse measurement input only.

9.5.5 Time Filter for Violation of Frequency / Analog Shock Input

Address: 1695
Description: Applicable only for GP Frequency input or analog input types.
This parameter defines the violation time before generating a corresponding alert in
100mseconds resolution
Default value: Default value 50 (5 seconds)

9.5.6 Shock Freq. Input Violation Type

Address: 1690, bits 1-0

Description: This parameter defines violation type as follows:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 196 of 237

0 Threshold 0 Low Threshold

1 High Threshold

1 Range 0 Keep In Range

1 - Keep Out range

Bit 3 Bit 2

Bit 3 defines type of the violation: threshold or range. If threshold type is selected, bits 2
define if the low or high thresholds are processed.
If range type is selected - bit 2 define if the violating value is inside or outside the range.

9.5.7 Threshold for Shock Input

Address: 1691
Description: Applicable only for discreet types (wet and dry)
This threshold defines the highest voltage on this input, which will still be considered as
logical zero. Any voltage above the value programmed in this parameter (as well as open
contact in case of dry) will be considered as logical "one".

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 197 of 237

NOTE: The type of input affects the voltage value; the same value will mean different
voltage for wet and discrete types.
The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input and comparing the average
measurement (refer to parameter below) with the threshold programmed in this
parameter.
Value span for wet type: 0 (0V) to 255 (30V).
Default Value: 125 (14.7V)
Value span for discrete type: 57 (0.2V) to 160 (1.45V). Any measured value below 57
or above 160 causes the unit to convert this value to default (125).
Default Value: 125 (1V)

9.5.8 Averaging Factor for Shock Input

Address: 1699
Description: The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input every 10 msec. The
moving average of sample's number (preprogrammed in this parameter) is reported to
the application and/or compared with the threshold (previous parameter) in order to
decide concerning the logical level of the input.
NOTE: In Full Hibernation mode the unit is ignoring averaging factor and processing each
measurement sample separately.
Default Value: 10 samples

9.5.9 Inverting Shock Input

Address: 100, bit 1

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 198 of 237

9.5.10 Reporting Signal Falling on Shock Input

Address: 124, bit 1 for event

128, bit 1 for distress
486, bit 1 for HRLS
Description: only applicable when the input type is configured as one of the discrete
types.
If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection of logical level
falling from 1 to 0. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of the alert upon
disconnection of this input from (-).
Default Value: zeros disabled (0(

9.5.11 Reporting Signal Rising on Shock Input

Address: 126, bit 1 for event

130, bit 1 for distress
488, bit 1 for HRLS
Description: Only applicable when the input type is configured as one of the discrete
types.
If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection of logical level
rising from 0 to 1. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of the alert upon
connection of this input to (-).
Default Value: zeroes disabled (0(

9.6 16 Panic
This input is equipped by an internal pull up resistor and therefore can only serve as
discrete dry contact.

9.6.1 Function Assigned to Panic Input

Address 1700, bits 0-6

Name in Programmer: Assigned Function
Description: This field enables assignation of certain functionality to a Panic input.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 199 of 237

Function Description Comment

number

0 Use as a GP input (default)

1-8 Reserved

9 Volume Up (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

10 Volume Down (refer to Volume Control section in this document)

11 Reserved

12 Over-speed threshold control

If this function is selected, the unit will automatically use speed threshold
programmed on address 2391 as both Over-speed start and Over-speed
end thresholds while this input is triggered.

13-31 Reserved

Default Value: zero GP input

9.6.2 Inverting Panic Input

Address: 100, bit 6

Description: Panic input is pulled up (internally); therefore it does require an inversion
when it is required to detect activation by low level (-).
Once inverted: the "low" level of signal (below threshold programmed in parameter
above) on this input will be treated as logical "1" (active). The "high" level of signal, as
well as floating state, on this input will be treated as logical "0" (not active).
Default Value: (1) inverted

9.6.3 Threshold for Panic Input

Address: 1701
Description: This threshold defines the highest voltage on this input, which will still be
considered as logical zero. Any voltage above the value programmed in this parameter
(as well as open contact) will be considered as logical "one".
The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input and comparing the average
measurement (refer to parameter below) with the threshold programmed in this
parameter.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 200 of 237

Value span: 57 (0.6V) to 240 (2.7V). Any measured value below 57 or above 240 causes
the unit to convert this value to default (200).
Default Value: 200

9.6.4 Averaging Factor for Panic Input

Address: 1702
Description: The unit is continually sampling voltage on this input every 10 msec. The
moving average of sample's number (preprogrammed in this parameter) is compared
with the threshold (previous parameter) in order to decide concerning the logical level of
the input.
NOTE: In the operational modes listed below the unit is ignoring averaging factor and
processing each measurement sample separately:

In Full Hibernation mode, including the Modem / GPS On Time

In Signal Correlation Mode (applicable in security builds only)

Default Value: 10 samples

9.6.5 Reporting Signal Falling on Panic

Address: 124, bit 6 for event

128, bit 6 for distress
486, bit 6 for HRLS
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection
of logical level falling from 1 to 0. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of
the alert upon disconnection of this input from (-).
Default Value: zeros disabled (0(

9.6.6 Reporting Signal Rising On Panic

Address: 126, bit 6 for event

130, bit 6 for distress
488, bit 6 for HRLS
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate a corresponding alert upon detection
of logical level rising from 0 to 1. In case this input is inverted, it will mean generation of
the alert upon connection of this input to (-).
Default Value: zero disabled (0(

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 201 of 237

10 Power Events

10.1 Power Threshold Settings

The thresholds listed below are used to determine if the main and backup power sources
are low or disconnected.
Each of these conditions (low and disconnected) for each of the power sources (main and
backup) is equipped by pair of thresholds enabling to alerts in sessions.
In the graph below it is described the voltage level of the battery (fat purple line) is
decreasing lower than the Low Threshold of Low Level (the Low level alert is issued), then
the battery is replaced: unplugged (disconnected alert issued); then the new battery is
connected (both Low and Disconnected Battery sessions are closed concurrently).

10.1.1 Main Power Low Threshold High/Low levels

Address: 115 high level

116 low level
Description: The unit will trigger Main Battery low alert if the measured level of the
main power will be lower than the value programmed in Main Power Low Threshold Low
Level parameter.
The unit will trigger Main Battery OK alert if the measured level of the main power will
be higher than the value programmed in Main Power Low Threshold High Level.
Data format: 8-bit unsigned,

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 202 of 237

0.1176470588235V/bit
Default values:
Address 115: 9.05V
Address 116: 8.58V

10.1.2 Main Power Disconnection Threshold High/Low Levels

Address: 113 High level

114 Low level
Description: The unit will trigger Main battery disconnected if the measured level of
the main power will be lower than the value programmed in Main Power Disconnection
Threshold Low Level parameter.
The unit will trigger Main battery re-connected event if the measured level of the main
power will be higher than the value programmed in Main Power Disconnection Threshold
High Level parameter.
Data format: 8-bit unsigned, 0.1176470588235V/bit
Default values: Address 113 - 5.29V
Address 114 4.82V

10.1.3 Backup Battery Low Threshold High/Low Levels

Address: 119 High level

120 Low level
Description: The unit will trigger Battery low alert if the measured level of the backup
battery will be lower than the value programmed in Backup Battery Low Threshold Low
Level parameter.
Note that the unit is not charging the battery in Ignition Off mode except in the following
cases:

When the Battery Low alert was issued upon Stop Event. In this case the unit might
activate the charger for limited time (as specified in "Maximum extra charge time"
parameter)

"Charge irrespectively to an operational mode" parameter is enabled.

The unit will trigger Battery OK alert when the measured level of the Backup Battery will
become higher than the value, programmed in Backup Battery Power Low Threshold High
Level.
Note that since the measured voltage of the backup battery during charging is ~0.2V
higher then measurement without a charging it is possible that the unit will report status
change (battery low or battery high) too early.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 203 of 237

In order to prevent this situation it is recommended not to set the battery thresholds to
tide.
Data format: 8-bit unsigned, 0.01647058823V/bit.
Default values: Address 119: 3.48V
Address 120: 3.52V

10.2 Power Events/Distress Control

10.2.1 Enabled Main Power Disconnected in Ignition Off Mode alert

Address: 121, bit 0 for events

122, bit 0 for distress
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate appropriate alerts upon detection
Main Power disconnected session start and end.
Default value: 0 disabled

10.2.2 Enabled Main Power Low in Ignition Off Mode Alert

Address: 121, bit 1 for events

122, bit 1 for distress
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate appropriate alerts upon detection
Main Power Low session start and end.
Default value: 0 disabled

10.2.3 Enabled Backup Battery Disconnected in Ignition Off Mode Alert

Address: 121, bit 2 for events

122, bit 2 for distress
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate appropriate alerts upon detection
Backup Battery Disconnect session start and end.
NOTE: The backup battery disconnection is sensed by voltage on NTC channel.
Default value: 0 disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 204 of 237

10.2.4 Enabled Backup Battery Low in Ignition Off Mode Alert

Address: 121, bit 3 for events

122, bit 3 for distress
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate appropriate alerts upon detection
Backup Battery Low session start and end.
Default value: 0 - disabled

10.2.5 Enabled Main Power Disconnected in Ignition On Mode Alert

Address: 121, bit 4 for events

122, bit 4 for distress
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate appropriate alerts upon detection
Main Power disconnected session start and end.
Default value: 0 disabled

10.2.6 Enabled Main Power Low in Ignition On Mode Alert

Address: 121, bit 5 for events

122, bit 5 for distress
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate appropriate alerts upon detection
Main Power Low session start and end.
Default value: 0 disabled

10.2.7 Enabled Backup Battery Disconnected in Ignition On Mode Alert

Address: 121, bit 6 for events

122, bit 6 for distress
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate appropriate alerts upon detection
Backup Battery Disconnect session start and end.
NOTES:

If backup battery is not installed the unit will not generate the "backup battery
disconnected" alert.

The backup battery disconnection is sensed by voltage on NTC channel.

Default value: 0 disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 205 of 237

10.2.8 Enabled Backup Battery Low in Ignition On Mode Alert

Address: 121, bit 7 for events

122, bit 7 for distress
Description: If this bit is set the unit will generate appropriate alerts upon detection
Backup Battery Low session start and end.
Default value: 0 - disabled

10.2.9 Period between the Alerts, Triggered by Detection of Power

Disconnection

Address: 1346
Description: Normally the trigger configured as a "plain event" is only generated once,
and the one configured as "distress" is generating single distress session upon trigger
detection (as described above in this document).
The "Main Power disconnected" is an exception from this rule. This alert can be generated
many times.
Note that if Main Power Disconnected alert is configured as "Distress" it will cause a
number of Distress sessions, according to the number, programmed in this parameters.
Resolution and data format: Minutes, from 1 to 255. 0 backward compatible mode,
cancels the repetitions (event or session will only be generated once)
Default value: 0 repetitions canceled

10.3 Radio-Off Mode (Hardcoded - Always Enabled)

Previously in Address: 1349, bit 1 (Now it does not have any configuration bit)
Note that the bit was added in Codebase 30j and removed in 31p; in all other versions
this feature is always enabled.
The feature described below is not applicable for CelloTrack variants. For CelloTrack
Radio-Off please refer to: Radio-Off (CelloTrack and CelloTrack Power)

Description: When the main power of Cello is disconnected and the unit is solely working
from internal backup battery the unit will switch its modem upon discharge of the battery
lower than 3.5V.
This way the remaining charge of the battery will allow maintenance of GPS, processor
and memory for generation (without OTA sending) of high number of events before
entering "Shipment Mode" (battery disconnect).
The unit will do the following:
1. Log an especial event "modem off" (TR207, specific data field 2) upon:

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 206 of 237

Solely working from internal backup battery.

Detection of internal backup battery voltage lower than 3.5V (on any temperature)
for longer than 1 second (100 samples).
2. Switch the modem off 2 seconds after the event generation, but keep generating and
logging events.
The modem is switched off even if there is a data transfer upon timer expiration.
Once switched off, the modem will be switched back on only upon main power
reconnection.
3. Log an especial event "Auto-Shipment due to a low power" (TR207, specific data field
0) upon discharging to 3.25V for longer than 1 second (100 samples).
4. Enter "Shipment Mode".

Default (Hardcoded) value: 1 - Enabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 207 of 237

11 Geo-Fences and Towing

11.1 Geo-Fence
The group of parameters below contains configuration structures of 100 internal Geo-
Fences of Cellocator unit. Each geo-fence is a rectangular perimeter, activated in a
selected time of the day. It is equipped by violation condition, capable to trigger an alert
or output activity upon occurrence.
During Ignition On mode the unit is continually examining its location and checking if it is
violating a condition of one of the fields.
Each of a 100 geo-fences is a structure of 16 bytes in the following order:
Byte 15

Byte 14

Byte 13

Byte 12

Byte 11

Byte 10

Byte 9

Byte 8

Byte 7

Byte 6

Byte 5

Byte 4

Byte 3

Byte 2

Byte 1

Byte 0
Field Config Maximal Latitude of Fence's Maximal Longitude of Fence's Configuration
description . byte Latitude Centrum Longitude Centrum bytes 1,2 and 3
4 Displace- Displace-
ment ment

Address

Fence 0
2496-2512
2512

2496
Fence 1
2513-2528
2528

2512

Fence 99
4080-4095
4095

4080

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 208 of 237

11.1.1 Format of Geographical Perimeter

Address: 2496-4095
Name in Programmer: EdgePoint 0001 0100
Description: The perimeter is defined by center coordinates and maximal displacement
for each coordinate (the same structure for longitude and latitude). The coordinates are
the usual 10-8 radians format. The displacement is 10 8 256 radians (the same format like
the coordinates but without the least significant byte and the most significant byte,
keeping only the middle bytes).

Maximal Longitude Displacement Longitude of Fence's Centrum

Segment Byte 8 Segment Byte 7 Segment Byte 6 Segment Byte 5 Segment Byte 4 Segment Byte 3

Maximal Latitude Displacement Latitude of Fence's Centrum

Segment Byte 14 Segment Byte 13 Segment Byte 12 Segment Byte 11 Segment Byte 10 Segment Byte 9

Default value: all bytes are zeroes (all waypoints disabled).

11.1.2 Four Configuration Bytes of the Fence

Address: Bytes 0, 1, 2 and 15 of each fence:

Output Control End time hours10 End time minutes Start time hours Start time minutes
Thresholds Select

Output
31 Speed Limiting

Number
Geo-Fence

1 TOE (LSB)
29 Activation

24 TOE MSB

TOE MSB
pattern
30

27
26

22
21
20
19

18
17
16

14
13

12
11
10
9
8
7

6
5
4
3
2

Config. Byte 3 Config. Byte 2 Config. Byte 1 Config. Byte 0

Segment Byte 15 Segment Byte 2 Segment Byte 1 Segment Byte 0

10
In order to set certain fence to be permanently active the start time shall be set to 0:00 and the
end time to 24:00

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 209 of 237

11.1.3 TOE - Type of Entry

This field defines the usage of an appropriate Fence entry.

Bit Bit 1 Bit 0 Entry type Geo Fence

24 Heading
Angle
Support

0 0 0 Entry is inactive (the whole 16 No

bytes are ignored by the unit)

0 0 1 Entry is active and treated as Yes

waypoint data

0 1 0 Entry is keep out fence data Yes

(unit must be outside location
window)

0 1 1 Entry is keep in fence data (unit Yes

must be inside location window)

1 0 0 Entry is treated as Geo-hotspot Yes

(both entering and leaving cause
a trigger)

1 0 1 Entry is treated as Modem Off Yes

zone. The unit generates an
event and switches off the
Cellular modem 10 seconds after
entering the zone.
The modem is turned on
immediately upon exiting from
the "no modem zone".

1 1 0 Speed limiting zone Yes

11.1.4 Waypoint
Waypoints are perimeters, which the unit has to be found at defined time intervals. The
unit must be found in the perimeter for at least one sample in the whole time window.
Once it happens, the waypoint is "checked" (i.e. no additional checks will be done for this
waypoint). If this does not happen, the unit will trigger a dedicated alert.

11.1.5 Geo Hot Spot

Generates trigger on entry and exit to a fenced zone. Transmission reason 191, Trigger's
transmission-reason-specific data: Bits 0-6 is the index of the slot. Most significant bit (bit

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 210 of 237

7) indicates direction: entry to hot spot ("1") or exit from hot spot ("0"). Behavior is not
affected by fence logic bit. Please note, Hot-Spot does not trigger outputs.

11.1.6 No Modem Zone

Generates trigger when shutting down modem as a result of entry to "no modem zone".
Trigger is generated only for the first fence that causes the modem's shutdown. Upon
entry to another overlapping (or common boundary) "no modem" zones, while modem is
already turned off, no more triggers are generated. Modem is shut down 10 seconds after
entering "no modem zone", regardless of trigger settings.
The modem is turned on immediately upon exiting from the "no modem zone".

11.1.7 Output Control

Geo-fence violation can trigger output activation. This feature is designed to let the unit
automatically notify the driver that he is violating pre-programmed geo-fence rule and, in
critical cases, even auto- immobilize a vehicle.
5 bits in each entry are defined for output activation as follows:

Activation pattern Output Number

Bit 29 Bit 28 Bit 27 Bit 26 Bit 25

The violation of the "Keep In", "Keep out" Geo-Fence will trigger output activation upon
violation (after Geo-Fence violation filter);
The Modem Off zone will trigger an output while inside the Geo-Fence (note that it is
possible to invert the logic of some outputs programmatically and this way to trigger
output activation outside the fence).
The output will be automatically deactivated upon Geo-Fence violation end.
The output activated by Geo-Fence logic is persistent, e.g. not disturbed by reset or AHR.
Upon violation the activated output might be switched off by Output Control Command
from Central Control. The unit will "remember" the status of the output and will restore it
upon initialization in case of reset.
Once deactivated by command, the output will be re-activated upon next violation.
The logic of the zone violation is set by zone type in TOE of the zone (for example Keep
Out zone will cause an assigned output to be activated when the unit will enter this zone).
Outputs Number description:

Outputs name Outputs number

Feature Disabled 0

Siren 1

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 211 of 237

Outputs name Outputs number

Gradual Stop 2

St. Immobilizer 3

LED 4

Blinkers 5

CFE Out 3 6

CFE Out 4 or PSP indication beep (if PSP 7

was enabled, Relevant only for session
start i.e. Entering the Zone)

11.1.8 Output Activation Pattern

Setting Action

0 Pulse Activation (The output shall be activated for the time, defined in
"Pulse Outputs Width Period", addr. 140 dec.

1 Change state to active upon trigger

2 Activate Gradually (only compatible with Gradual Stop output)

3 Activate Nested (executed only after vehicle stops, e.g. Ignition off or 10
valid GPS packets showing speed lower than 1 km/h)

11.2 Fences Configuration

11.2.1 Geo-Fence Logic

Address: 6, bit 5
Description: This parameter defines the reference of the unit to the geo-fences
(Applicable only for Keep In and Keep Out types).
Global context mode (fence logic = 0)
Keep in fences logic:
When position changes, trigger is generated if both terms below are true:

In the new position *ALL* keep-in fences are in violation state (meaning - position is
outside all keep-in fences).

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 212 of 237

Previously at least one of the fences wasn't in violation state (position was in the area
of at least one of the fences).
Trigger's transmission-reason-specific data is the index of latest slot that changed its
status to violation state.
Keep out fences logic:
When position changes, trigger is generated if both the terms below are true:

In the new position at least one of the fences is in violation state (meaning - position
is inside one of the keep-out fences).

Previously *ALL* keep-out fences weren't in violation state (position was outside the
area of all keep-out fences).
Trigger's transmission-reason-specific data is the index of latest slot that changed its
status to violation state.
Discrete context mode (fence logic = 1):
Triggers are generated discretely for violation of each keep-in/out fence, regardless of
other fences status. Trigger's transmission-reason-specific data is the index of the slot
that changed its status to violation state.
Default: 0 - Global context mode

11.2.2 Geo-Fence Violation Filter

Address: 1006
Description: This parameter designed to reduce number of fault Geo-Fence violation
events. It defines required amount of sequential valid GPS packets (GPS packets are
received every second) introducing Geo-Fence violation in order to generate an alert.
Default value: 1
Note: the violation filter is not applicable with waypoint type Geo-Fences (since by
definition, in a waypoint type Geo-Fence one GPS sample in which the unit is inside the
Geo-Fence perimeter is enough to "check" positively this Geo-Fence).

11.2.3 Ignore Geo-Fence Violation on Boot (after Reset)

Address: 1, bit 2
Description: If this bit is set, the "first geo-violation changes ignore" mode is activated.
This mode allows avoiding generation violation repetitions upon any kind of reset. In this
mode, the unit will use the first stable violation state as the baseline for subsequent
processing of geo-fences.
This means that any geo-fences in violation state on the first stable status are not
reported, and only subsequent changes are reported.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 213 of 237

Once started, "first geo-violation changes ignore" mode terminates when:

A valid, stable GPS fix and geo-fence state is achieved. Any geo-violations at this
point are not reported, and used as baseline.

120 seconds timeout expires. The rationale for this is not ignore important changes
occurring at a later time, if this state started when there is no GPS coverage.

After "first geo-violation changes ignore mode" ends, subsequent geo-violation

changes are reported as usual.
Note that due to this mode's timeout, if GPS takes longer than 120 seconds to achieve a
fix after boot, any active geo-violation will be reported as usual when GPS fix is finally
achieved
Default value: 0 Do not ignore violations on boot

11.2.4 Control of Geo-Fence Alters (Events and Distress)

11.2.4.1 Keep In Geo-Fence Zone Violation

Address: 1004, bit 0

1005, bit 0
Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will generate an alerts upon violation of Keep
In Type of Geo-Zones.
Default: 0 both disabled

11.2.4.2 Keep Out Geo-Fence Zone Violation

Address: 1004, bit 1

1005, bit 1
Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will generate an alerts upon violation of Keep
Out Type of Geo-Zones.
Default: 0 both disabled

11.2.4.3 Way Point Violation

Address: 1004, bit 2

1005, bit 2
Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will generate an alerts upon violation of Way
Point Type of Geo-Zones.
Default: 0 both disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 214 of 237

11.2.4.4 Geo Hot Spot Violation

Address: 1004, bit 3

1005, bit 3
Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will generate an alerts upon violation of Geo
Hot Spot Type of Geo-Zones.
Default: 0 both disabled

11.2.4.5 No Modem Zone Entry

Address: 1004, bit 4

1005, bit 4
Description: If this bit is enabled the unit will generate an alerts upon violation of No
Modem Type of Geo-Zones.
Default: 0 both disabled

11.2.5 Geo-Fence Heading Angle

Address: 1921-2020
Description: This feature enables each Geo-Fence to be conditioned by the vehicles
approach angle. An array of 100 bytes was allocated in the units configuration memory to
hold the Geo-Fence approach angle entries. Each entry holds a number between 0 to 11
representing 12 possible angle ranges of 30 degrees with resolution of +- 30 Degrees.
Each entry also holds control bits to enable the Geo-Fence Angle for direct and opposite
headings.
Enable Enable Spare Geo-Fence Approach Angle
direct Opposite
approach approach Code Engle
Angle angle [Degrease]
0 0
1 30
2 60
3 90
4 120
5 150
6 180
7 210
8 240
9 270

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 215 of 237

10 300
11 330

7 6 5 4 0-3

The following diagram shows possible scenario of a vehicle approaching geo-Fence with
predefined heading relative to earths north and the same vehicle approaching the same
geo-fence from the opposite direction. In this case both enable bits must be set to detect
the event. The feature can trigger outputs just like any Geo-Fence. It is possible to
generate audible alert via CE8 device if PSP is enabled and Geo-Fence output code
number 7 is selected. See Geo-Fence output control. For more information about the
relations between GEO-Fence heading and the TOE (Type of Entry field setting the Goe-
Fence functional settings please refer to: GeoEnceHeadingAngleSupport. Please note Hot-
Spot does not support output activation.
Opposite Approach
Angle
N

180

Camera

Geo-Fence
N
Direct Approach
180
Angle

Default: 0 disabled

11.2.6 Geo-Fence Priority

Address: 6550-6574
Description: Geo-Fences are defined by a center coordinate, and latitude + longitude
displacements from center (i.e. only rectangular zones can be defined).

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 216 of 237

Thus, when trying to cover a road (which obviously has turns and curves) with the
rectangular Geo-Fences, some overlapping between Geo-Fences is necessary.
In some cases, this causes the unit to produce too many speed violation events, which may
cause excess workload and confusion to the operator.
To solve this and create zone "continuity", a configurable priority is assigned for each Geo-
Fence.
The priorities are:

Priority Value
1 (highest) 00
2 01
3 10
4 (lowest) - default 11

Address 6574 ... Address 6550

GeoFence GeoFence GeoFence GeoFence GeoFence GeoFence GeoFence GeoFence
...
100 99 98 97 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
...
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

When the priorities of overlapping Geo-Fences are different, the unit considers only the
boundary of the highest priority Geo-Fence:

Priority 1 Priority 1

Priority 2 Priority 2

When the priorities of overlapping Geo-Fences are equal, the unit considers them as one
Geo-Fence with common boundaries:

Priority 2 Priority 2

Priority 2

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 217 of 237

11.3 Towing Detection and Towed Mode (Not supported by

CelloTrack)

11.3.1 Towing Detection

Towing detection logic is activated in Engine Off mode irrespective of Hibernation mode.
The unit will store the coordinates upon Stop alert generation (only if the location
considered as valid).
During parking (continually, upon GPS peek, as per hibernation mode settings; the GPS
peek can also be activated upon movement detection by accelerometer) the unit will
examine its location and speed. If the location changes from the Journey Stop or speed
are detected while ignition switch is off the towing alert will be triggered.

11.3.1.1 Towing Detection - Speed Threshold

Address: 132 133

Description: The unit will trigger Speed Detected During Parking alert if:

The measured value of speed will be higher than the value programmed in this
parameter.

Towing detection alert (event or distress) is enabled

Data format: 16-bit unsigned. [km/h] units.
Default value: 200 (~7.2 km/h)

11.3.1.2 Towing Detection - Geo-Fence Perimeter

Address: 134-135
Description: The unit will trigger Geo-fence violation alert if
latitude or longitude of the current location differ from the location
recorded upon Stop by more than programmed in this parameter.
Note that this alert will not be triggered if the location recorded
upon Journey Stop is invalid.
Data format: 16-bit unsigned integer, 10-8 radians resolution.
Default value: 4096

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 218 of 237

11.3.1.3 Towing Detection and Towed Mode Time Filter

Address: 137
Description: This parameter defines the time of which towing speed or location violation
are required to be detected for Towing Detection, or accelerometer movement is required
to be detected for Towed Mode.
Range: 0-255 Seconds
Default value: 10 Seconds

11.3.1.4 Enable GPS Wake Up upon Movement for Towing Detection

Address: 467, bit 1

Description: This parameter only affects if Movement detection source is set as
"Ignition Input". If this bit is set, the unit will wake up GPS for immediate legacy Towing
Detection procedure upon movement detection while ignition is off.
Default value: 1 wake up GPS

11.3.1.5 Towing Alerts (Distress and Event) Control

8.3.1.1.1 Enable Alert upon Towing Speed Detection

Address: 99, bit 6 for event

102, bit 6 for distress
Description: This parameter enables generation of the Towing Speed alert upon
detection.
Default Value: 0 Disabled

8.3.1.1.2 Enable Alert upon Towing Location Detection

Address: 99, bit 7 for event

102, bit 7 for distress
Description: This parameter enables generation of the Towing Location change alert
upon detection. Note that this alert will only be generated if valid GPS location was
recorded upon Trip Stop.
Default Value: 0 Disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 219 of 237

11.3.2 Towed Mode

Towed mode allows to detect vehicle movement, when the in Ignition Off, depending on
accelerometer (rather than the older Towing Detection feature which depends on GPS).
The pre-conditions for entering Towed Mode are:

"Enable Towed Mode" (address 467, bit 6) is enabled

"Use accelerometer for Start&Stop" (address 467, bit 0) is set to 0 (Ignition (Legacy))
Towed Mode feature works only when connecting the unit to physical ignition line.

Ignition is Off
Given that those pre-conditions exist, the unit will enter Towed Mode when movement is
detected for longer than the time defined in "Towing Detection and Towed Mode Time
Filter" (address 137).
The movement threshold depends on "Movement Detection type" (address 467, Bit 2),
"Sensitivity" (address 467, 3-4), and on the unit mode (Operational/Hibernation).
During Towed Mode the unit will behave exactly as it would do during Ignition On, except
for the following:

The Ignition switch will remain Off

If "Enable Start-Stop Towed Mode event/distress" (address 470, bit 0/1) are enabled:
Instead of Driving Start event (TR69) the unit will send Towed Mode Start event
(TR8/STR1)
Instead of Driving Stop event (TR53) the unit will send Towed Mode Stop event
(TR8/STR2)

Unit Mode of Operation field in all corresponding Wire and Wireless messages will
contain Towed Mode (0x10).
The unit will exit Towed Mode when:

Ignition switches to On (physical input status). In this case the unit will send:
Towing Mode Stop event (TR8/STR2)
Driving Start event (TR69)

Idling (lack of movement) is detected for longer than defined in "Towing Detection
and Towed Mode Time Filter" (address 137). In this case the unit will send Towing
Mode Stop event (TR8/STR2).

11.3.2.1 Enable Towed Mode

Address 467, bit 6

Description: This parameter allows to enable Towed Mode.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 220 of 237

Default Value: 0 Disabled

11.3.2.2 Enable Towed Mode Start-Stop Distress/Event

Address 470, bit 0 - for event

bit 1 for distress
Description: These parameters allow to enable Towed Mode Start-Stop events (TR8,
STR1 or 2) upon entrance or exit to or from Towed Mode.
Default: 0 Disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 221 of 237

12 Crash Detection Feature

12.1 General
The units accelerometer is used as a source for crash detection and reporting.
The feature includes 2 separate RMS based thresholds, one for light crash and one for
heavy crash.
The detection will not be possible when in full-hibernation mode (ignition is OFF).
The light crash detection requires the unit to be installed horizontally for gravity to be
eliminated.

Cellocator FW samples and calculates the average of Accelerometer Data at 100 Hz rate.
Only 3 consequential samples which violate the crash threshold are considered a crash.

The following confusing case may certainly occur:

Unit reports on "Light" crash and shows the value of "g" which is greater than the
"Heavy" crash threshold.
The reason for such behavior:
1. Reporting on crash, Unit picks up only the highest value of "g" for its reports.
2. It is still deemed "Light" crash, not "Heavy", because only one sample violates the
"High Threshold".
Also, the timeout value to be expired making it possible to generate the next crash event,
is 2 seconds.

High
TH

Low
TH

0 t

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 222 of 237

Some improvement from FW release 33x and later:

1. This feature will work also in ignition-off state as long as the Hibernation is not
full.
2. This feature will work also while the accelerometer is the Ignition source.

12.2 Crash Detection Configurable Parameters

12.2.1 Light Crash Detection Threshold

Address: 2384 bits 06 - Light crash detection threshold

Description: This parameter contains the value of acceleration RMS (gravity eliminated),
used to detect a light crash (any acceleration higher than this threshold and lower than
the threshold of heavy crash for longer than 3 sequential samples (30ms) will be
considered a light crash).
Resolution: 0.072g
Valid range: 2gX9.2g, higher and lower programmed values are automatically
saturated.
Default: 2g

12.2.2 Heavy Crash Detection Threshold

Address: 2385 bits 06 - Heavy crash detection threshold

Description: This parameter contains the value of acceleration RMS (gravity included),
used to detect a heavy crash (any acceleration higher than this threshold for longer than
3 sequential samples (30ms) will be considered a heavy crash).
Resolution: 0.072g
Valid range: 2gX9.2g, higher and lower programmed values are automatically
saturated.
Default: 5g

12.2.3 Enable Crash Detection Events for Light/Heavy Crash

Address: 2390 bit 0 for Light Crash

2390 bit 1 for Heavy Crash

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 223 of 237

Description: If this bit is enabled, the unit will issue an event containing reason and sub-
reason when thresholds are crossed. If the light crash is enabled, the units logic assumes
it is installed parallel to ground (horizontally) and ignoring Z axis.
Default: 0 Disable

12.2.4 Enable Distress for Light/Heavy Crash

Address: 2390 bit 2 for Light Crash

2390 bit 3 for Heavy Crash
Description: If this bit is enabled, the unit will issue a distress event containing reason
and sub-reason. If the light crash is enabled, the unit is assuming that it is installed in
parallel to ground (horizontally) and ignoring Z axis.
Default: 0 - Disable

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 224 of 237

13 OneWire Temperature Sensors

The oneWire Temperature Sensors feature enables new platform HW units to be
connected to up to 4 oneWire temperature sensors. The oneWire temperature sensors are
based on Maxims's DS18B20 chip, see:
http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/DS18B20.pdf. The user can connect up to
4 oneWire temperature sensors in parallel. The users need first to enable the oneWire Bus
mode.

OW-TEMP-Bx-xxx
OneWire Temperature
Sensors

DallasBus Cello

Type 0 message includes 4 bytes containing 4 possible measurement sources. The user
can select the source of these 4 bytes by configuring the measurement source as
described in Bytes 26-29 of OTA Message 0. It is possible to select each one of the 4
oneWire temperature sensors as source. If Type 0 measurements are required, the user
needs to configure the OneWire Update Period to be none zero value and configure
Enable RT or Enable Logged configuration bits. See: oneWire temperature
measurement update configuration for more information. The user has also the ability to
poll the unit for measured temperature results by issuing a type 9 request. The unit will
process the request and send a consolidated Type 9 message response with all the 4
measurements. It is mandatory to set non zero Update Period to enable the
temperature sensors before issuing Type 9 request. The detailed Type 9 message format
is described in: Cellocator Wireless Communication Protocol: Section 2.6.21: oneWire
Temperature Sensor Measurement OutBound (Sub. Data 0x19) and section
3.6.15: oneWire Temperature Sensor Measurement Request InBound (Sub. Data 0x19)
The feature supports different Update Periods for GSM Home and Roam network. When
both update Periods values are set to 0, the feature is considered disabled.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 225 of 237

13.1 One Wire Temperature Measurement Update

Configuration

Address: 2459: Home Network

2460: Roam Network
Description: This parameter contains a bitmap controlling the functioning of One Wire
temperature sensors.
Configuration Byte Format:

Update period (1 minute resolution) Enable RT Enable logged

0 disable 0 disable
1 enable 1 enable

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Configuration Byte Modes:

Update Enable Enable Description

Period RT Logged
0 0 0 The feature is disabled
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
0 0 0 The temperature sensors are polled in the rate
defined under: Update Period.
Measurements are not logged and not sent in
real time (Type 9).
The unit will answer Type 9 measurements
requests.
0 0 1 The temperature sensors are polled in the rate
defined under: Update Period.
Measurements are logged and not sent in real
time (Type 9), according to legacy logged/RT
events logics.
The unit will answer Type 9 measurements
requests.
0 1 0 The temperature sensors are polled in the rate
defined under: Update Period.
Measurements are sent in real time (Type 9),
according to legacy logged/RT events logics.

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 226 of 237

The unit will answer Type 9 measurements

requests.
0 1 1 The temperature sensors are polled in the rate
defined under: Update Period.
Measurements are logged and sent in real time
(Type 9), according to legacy logged/RT events
logics.
The unit will answer Type 9 measurements
requests.

Note:
According to legacy logged/RT events logics:
Logged event transmitted during occurrence only if there is a GPRS connection
RT event transmitted during occurrence unconditionally (i.e. wakes the unit if it's in
hibernation mode, and/or send the event by SMS if GPRS is not available)

Default: 0 - Feature Disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 227 of 237

14 Auxiliary Satellite Unit

Compatibility: GNSS units support this feature natively and CR300 units (starting 41x
firmware) as an optional feature.
This feature enables an auxiliary satellite communication device to be activated when the
Cello unit losses GSM or GPRS connectivity. The Auxiliary Satellite unit could be activated
in two operational modes:
Basic Auxiliary Satellite Mode:
In this mode the Cello unit turns on the Auxiliary Satellite modem when No GSM or "no
GPRS" condition is detected. In this mode the Auxiliary Satellite modem autonomously
generate location events based on its embedded GPS. The Auxiliary Satellite Modem will
be turned off, and control will be moved to the GSM network when the Cello unit detects
GSM or GPRS network connectivity.
The "Blinkers" output control the Auxiliary Satellite device. While Cello or CR300/B is
hibernating, its auxiliary satellite device will be turned off. The end unit will automatically
turn the auxiliary unit on when GSM or GPRS is lost for the time defined in section 22.1.1.
The Cello unit will automatically turn off the auxiliary unit when GSM or GPRS is restored
for at least the time defined in 22.1.2.
Advanced Auxiliary Satellite Mode (Infrastructure, currently not implemented):
The advanced Auxiliary Satellite support uses the Auxiliary Satellite unit as an alternative
path for communication with the server. Unlike the basic mode, the advanced mode will
send the legacy Cellocator messages via the satellite link to the server. The messages
sent over the satellite communication link are stored into the Satellite service provider
servers data base and sent via the internet to the fleet management server.
Both Basic and advanced Satellite share the same criteria for declaring GSM / GPRS
Loss and GSM / GPRS reconnect. The feature's configurable options include timeout
values defining "GSM loss" and "GSM reconnect" timeouts. Both values must be Non Zero
for the feature to be operational.

14.1 Auxiliary Satellite: Cellular network connect-reconnect

criteria

Address: 650: Bit 0

Description: This bit defines the criteria for declaring cellular network availability.
Setting the bit to 0 (GSM) will switch the unit to Satellite mode when GSM network is not
found. Setting the bit to 1(GPRS) will switch to Satellite mode when GPRS network is not
found (while GSM might be available).
0-GSM
1-GPRS

Default value: 0 GSM

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 228 of 237

14.2 Falling Back to Satellite

14.2.1 Auxiliary Satellite: No GSM-GPRS Timeout (Basic, Advanced)

Address: 1345: Bits 0-3

Description: This configurable parameter defines No-Cellular network time criteria for
the unit to switch on its auxiliary satellite device. The NO-Cellular configurable timeout
has configurable resolution of 0.5 or 16 minutes per bit. The configurable parameter must
be non-zero for the feature to function.
This parameter is common for both Basic and Advanced Auxiliary Satellite modes.
Default value: 0 Feature Disabled
NOTE: Please note that when the Auxiliary Satellite Unit- Cellular network connect
reconnect criteria (Add. 650, Bit 0) is configured for GPRS, the minimal value must be
2 (1 Minute).

14.2.2 Auxiliary Satellite: Timeout Resolution for No GSM-GPRS

Address: 650, Bit 1

Description: This parameter defines the resolution for NO GSM-GPRS Timeout.

Auxiliary Satellite: Timeout Resolution

Resolution for No GSM-GPRS

0 30 Seconds

1 16 Minutes

Default value: 0 30 Seconds

14.3 Restore Cellular

14.3.1 Auxiliary Satellite: GSM-GPRS Reconnect Timeout (Basic,

Advanced)

Address: 1345: Bits 4-7

Description: This parameter defies the criteria for declaring Cellular network as restored.
This configurable parameter defines the "Cellular Network Reconnect" timeout in
programmable resolution (0.5 minutes or 16 minutes). The configurable parameter must
be non-zero for the feature to function.
This parameter is common for both Basic and Advanced Auxiliary Satellite modes.
Default value: 0 Feature Disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 229 of 237

14.3.2 Auxiliary Satellite: Timeout Resolution of GSM-GPRS Reconnect

Address: 650, Bit 2

Description: This parameter defines the resolution for NO GSM-GPRS Timeout.

Auxiliary Satellite: Timeout Resolution

Resolution of GSM-GPS Reconnect

0 30 Seconds

1 16 Minutes

Default value: 0 30 Seconds

14.4 Satellite Control Bitmask

Address: 650

Reserved Auxiliary Reserved Reserved Auxiliary Timeout Timeout Auxiliary

Satellite Satellite resolution of resolution Satellite
Unit- Unit- Enable GSM-GPRS for No GSM- Unit- Cellular
Satellite Periodic Reconnect GPRS network
Operational Distress connect
Mode Events reconnect
0-Basic 0-Disable criteria:
0-GSM
1-Advanced 1-Enable
1-GPRS

Bits 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Default value: 0 GSM

14.4.1 Auxiliary Satellite Unit- Enable Periodic Distress Events

Address: 650: Bit 3

Description: When the unit is in Advanced Satellite mode and NO GSM condition is
detected and this bit is enabled, the unit will start sending periodic Distress events with
Transmit Reason 44 (Timed Event). If the unit is in hibernation, the periodic distress will
turn on the Auxiliary Satellite for a distress transmission session. The Period between the
Distress Event is defined in the parameter: Auxiliary Satellite Unit- Periodic Distress
Report Period, Address 656.
Default value: 0 Disabled

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 230 of 237

14.4.2 Auxiliary Satellite Unit - Satellite Operational Mode

Address: 650: Bit 6

Description: This bit defines the Auxiliary Satellite Operational mode. The bit selects
between Basic and Advanced mode. The basic mode only turns the Auxiliary Satellite unit
on while the advanced mode uses the satellite unit as an alternative transmission channel
to the fleet server.
0-Basic Satellite Mode
1-Advanced Satellite Mode
Default value: 0 Basic

14.4.3 Auxiliary Satellite Unit - Periodic Distress Report Period

Address: 656
Description: This parameter defines the period between Periodic Distress Events. This
parameter is only relevant when: Auxiliary Satellite Unit - Enable Periodic Distress Events
is enabled.
Resolution: 30 Seconds
Default value: 10 5 Minutes

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 231 of 237

15 TDLT

15.1 Overview
TDLT is an application specifically tailored for Hours of Service regulation requirements,
based on CR300B unit.
The application receives driver license information from an external source (magnetic
card reader) which is connected to the unit by serial communication (the information is
sent as ASCII string), and confirms that the driver license is valid for the current vehicle.
While driving, the application checks that the driver didn't exceed his driving hour's
limitation, and if needed, issues a warning by a buzzer connected to one of the unit
outputs.
The unit manages 2 operating modes:
Logged In - in which a certain driver swiped his driver license and found valid to use
the vehicle
Not Logged In - in which no driver is logged in
Login is possible only in Ignition On, and only one driver is able to be logged in a given
time. A driving session of a certain driver, in which his timer is counting, is considered
only when that certain driver is logged in.

15.2 TDLT Configuration

Address: 460

Spare Spare Spare Spare TDLT Output Number Enable

TDLT

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

15.2.1 Disable TDLT

Address: 460, bit 0
Description: This parameter enables the TDLT logics. When disabled the unit will
operate with legacy fleet logics. When enabled both TDLT and legacy fleet logics will be
available (just magnetic card reader + M2C will be available on the serial channel)
Data Range: 0 - Enable; 1 - Disable
Default Value: 1 Disable

15.2.2 TDLT Output Number

Address: 460, bits 1-3

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 232 of 237

Description: This parameter enables to configure the output on which the TDLT alarms
will be activated.
Data Range:

Output name Output number

Feature Disabled 0

Reserved 1

Reserved 2

Reserved 3

LED 4

Blinkers 5

Reserved 6

Reserved 7

Default Value: 0 - Feature Disabled

15.3 TDLT Dedicated Message

The TDLT application transmits dedicated OTA message (Type 11, module 60). The
message includes information read from the driver license, as well as other data
regarding the unit status.
This message is sent upon:
Driver license card swipe, for both valid and not valid driver license cards.
Periodically, when a driver is logged in
Periodically, when no driver is logged in, including when in Ignition Off

Address: 461

TDLT Dedicated Message TDLT Dedicated Message

Transmission Rate No Driver Transmission Rate Driver Logged In
Logged In

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

15.3.1 TDLT Dedicated Message Transmission Rate - Driver Logged In

Address: 461, bits 0-3

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 233 of 237

Description: This parameter allows to define the transmission rate of the periodical
TDLT dedicated message (Type 11, module 60) when a driver is logged in. 0 - Disables
the periodic transmission.
Data Range: 0 - 7.5 minutes; 0.5 minute resolution
Default Value: 0

15.3.2 TDLT Dedicated Message Transmission Rate - No Driver Logged In

Address: 461, bits 4-7
Description: This parameter allows to define the transmission rate of the periodical
TDLT dedicated message (Type 11, module 60) when no driver is logged in. 0 - Disables
the periodic transmission.
Data Range: 0 - 7.5 minutes; 0.5 minute resolution
Default Value: 0

15.4 TDLT Vehicle Type

Address: 462
Description: This parameter allows to configure the vehicle type. If the unit recognizes
swiping of a driver license which is not compatible with the vehicle type, the license will
be considered as not valid.
Data Range:
Vehicle Type Code
All 0
Truck-L1 (Private) 1
Truck-L2 (Private) 2
Truck-L3 (Private) 3
Truck-L5 (Private) 4
BUS-M1 (Private), > 20 Passengers 5
BUS-M2 (Private), > 20 Passengers 6
BUS-M3 (Private), > 20 Passengers 7
BUS-M4 (Private), > 20 Passengers 8
BUS-M7 (Private), > 20 Passengers 9
BUS-M1 (Private), < 20 Passengers 10
BUS-M2 (Private), < 20 Passengers 11
BUS-M3 (Private), < 20 Passengers 12
BUS-M7 (Private), < 20 Passengers 13
Van (Private) 14
Truck-L1 (Service) 15
Truck-L2 (Service) 16
Truck-L3 (Service) 17
Truck-L5 (Service) 18
BUS-M1 (Service), > 20 Passengers 19

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 234 of 237

BUS-M2 (Service), > 20 Passengers 20

BUS-M3 (Service), > 20 Passengers 21
BUS-M4 (Service), > 20 Passengers 22
BUS-M7 (Service), > 20 Passengers 23
BUS-M1 (Service), < 20 Passengers 24
BUS-M2 (Service), < 20 Passengers 25
BUS-M3 (Service), < 20 Passengers 26
BUS-M7 (Service), < 20 Passengers 27
Van (Service) 28
Truck-L4 (Private) 29
Truck-L4 (Service) 30
Truck-L9 (Private) 31
Truck-L9 (Service) 32

Default Value: 0 All

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 235 of 237

Cellocator Cello Programming Manual Page 236 of 237

Copyright 2017 by Pointer Telocation, Ltd.
POINTER TELOCATION LTD. 14 HAMELACHA ST. ROSH HA'AYIN 4809133, ISRAEL TEL: 972-3-5723111 FAX: 972-3-5723100 WWW.POINTER.COM

Owner's Manual: Power Zone Pro Main Controller
No ratings yet
Owner's Manual: Power Zone Pro Main Controller
32 pages
g90b Plus User Manual
0% (1)
g90b Plus User Manual
50 pages
TELE9753 Tutorial 2
No ratings yet
TELE9753 Tutorial 2
4 pages
Emcp 2 +P Wirindd - Google Search
No ratings yet
Emcp 2 +P Wirindd - Google Search
3 pages
InteliLite NT Datasheet en HT
No ratings yet
InteliLite NT Datasheet en HT
4 pages
Aigo GE5, Microscopio Digital, Manual English
100% (1)
Aigo GE5, Microscopio Digital, Manual English
32 pages
Liebert Intellislot Modbus Rtu Reference Guide SL 28170 - 001 435 456
No ratings yet
Liebert Intellislot Modbus Rtu Reference Guide SL 28170 - 001 435 456
40 pages
LG Multi Fault Codes
No ratings yet
LG Multi Fault Codes
19 pages
Programming Manual Cellocator CR200-CR200B Rev31d-8
20% (5)
Programming Manual Cellocator CR200-CR200B Rev31d-8
87 pages
Bcr-40u Bcr-50v Bcr-220 Owner S Manual Ver 1.7
No ratings yet
Bcr-40u Bcr-50v Bcr-220 Owner S Manual Ver 1.7
28 pages
LV6548V Manual-20221104
No ratings yet
LV6548V Manual-20221104
76 pages
Manual Generador Domosa Lombardini-Nsm
No ratings yet
Manual Generador Domosa Lombardini-Nsm
8 pages
Reactive Power Control Relay RM 2106 2112 Operating Instructions
No ratings yet
Reactive Power Control Relay RM 2106 2112 Operating Instructions
44 pages
HF2211 User Manual
No ratings yet
HF2211 User Manual
27 pages
InternetBridge-NT 2.4.0 Global Guide PDF
No ratings yet
InternetBridge-NT 2.4.0 Global Guide PDF
51 pages
Dse4420 Installation Inst
67% (3)
Dse4420 Installation Inst
2 pages
Parker SSD Drives 590PR Manual en
No ratings yet
Parker SSD Drives 590PR Manual en
466 pages
SX460 Manual
100% (1)
SX460 Manual
4 pages
Kenwood KDC-X396 Manual
No ratings yet
Kenwood KDC-X396 Manual
24 pages
Ajustes Del Emcp Ii+ (Caterpillar Electronic Modular Control Panel Ii+)
No ratings yet
Ajustes Del Emcp Ii+ (Caterpillar Electronic Modular Control Panel Ii+)
4 pages
50a Service Manual PDF
No ratings yet
50a Service Manual PDF
15 pages
PSM DC 1006net Serial
No ratings yet
PSM DC 1006net Serial
42 pages
INNOVATE MTX-L Manual
No ratings yet
INNOVATE MTX-L Manual
21 pages
Encoder RLS MBD01 - 02 PDF
No ratings yet
Encoder RLS MBD01 - 02 PDF
32 pages
411 Terminated Folded Dipole Antenna
No ratings yet
411 Terminated Folded Dipole Antenna
2 pages
Comap InteliDrive EM User Guide v.1.0
No ratings yet
Comap InteliDrive EM User Guide v.1.0
56 pages
Evolution: User Manual
No ratings yet
Evolution: User Manual
7 pages
SS460 Instructions
No ratings yet
SS460 Instructions
4 pages
Winner Pro+
No ratings yet
Winner Pro+
2 pages
Manual RGAM10
100% (2)
Manual RGAM10
21 pages
Dse6610 Dse6620 Installation Instructions
No ratings yet
Dse6610 Dse6620 Installation Instructions
2 pages
056-092 Best Practices For Wiring Resistive Sensors
100% (2)
056-092 Best Practices For Wiring Resistive Sensors
4 pages
User Manual: HGM170/170HC
No ratings yet
User Manual: HGM170/170HC
11 pages
DIP Switch PLL Excitador M31 (Plaqueta Color Verde)
0% (1)
DIP Switch PLL Excitador M31 (Plaqueta Color Verde)
1 page
Po USB12
100% (1)
Po USB12
1 page
Hardware and Engineering PS 4-101-DD1 PS 4-111-DR1 PS 4-111-DR5
No ratings yet
Hardware and Engineering PS 4-101-DD1 PS 4-111-DR1 PS 4-111-DR5
93 pages
Stock
No ratings yet
Stock
24 pages
1 Introduction To STM32F103 v21
No ratings yet
1 Introduction To STM32F103 v21
39 pages
Hhj-60a 0620-2-1
No ratings yet
Hhj-60a 0620-2-1
14 pages
Curtis Controller 50208 - 1239E - RevC3
No ratings yet
Curtis Controller 50208 - 1239E - RevC3
6 pages
SC 1006 Net Gama Tronic
100% (1)
SC 1006 Net Gama Tronic
42 pages
XY-WJ01 Programmable Relay: Description
No ratings yet
XY-WJ01 Programmable Relay: Description
5 pages
L011199 - PRONET-E Series Users Manual - V2.11
No ratings yet
L011199 - PRONET-E Series Users Manual - V2.11
198 pages
BDM Driver
No ratings yet
BDM Driver
16 pages
Dallas 2501
No ratings yet
Dallas 2501
1 page
Mebay
No ratings yet
Mebay
11 pages
Pa2032a PDF
No ratings yet
Pa2032a PDF
4 pages
Pioneer Service Manual - Dvh-3200ub, 3220ub, 3250ub, 3290ub
75% (4)
Pioneer Service Manual - Dvh-3200ub, 3220ub, 3250ub, 3290ub
129 pages
ssc9503 10 12
No ratings yet
ssc9503 10 12
2 pages
Gcm02-Mt-Ing4 New1 PDF
67% (3)
Gcm02-Mt-Ing4 New1 PDF
57 pages
Janitza Manual UMG96 All Versions en PDF
No ratings yet
Janitza Manual UMG96 All Versions en PDF
32 pages
Sheet EMCP II+
100% (1)
Sheet EMCP II+
4 pages
72R-1000 - CTX O&m MX60
No ratings yet
72R-1000 - CTX O&m MX60
18 pages
DSE7210 Installation Instructions
No ratings yet
DSE7210 Installation Instructions
2 pages
Arcotronics MKP C.44 400uf
100% (1)
Arcotronics MKP C.44 400uf
3 pages
Avr Conversion Instructions: For Use With Sx460 Avr Part No. E000-24600 AND E000-24602
No ratings yet
Avr Conversion Instructions: For Use With Sx460 Avr Part No. E000-24600 AND E000-24602
1 page
Assembly and Parts Album: KDE60SS3
No ratings yet
Assembly and Parts Album: KDE60SS3
1 page
Cellocator Manual GPS
No ratings yet
Cellocator Manual GPS
365 pages
Cello-IQ Programming Manual
No ratings yet
Cello-IQ Programming Manual
346 pages
CelloTrack Nano Programming Manual
No ratings yet
CelloTrack Nano Programming Manual
219 pages
Cyber Forensics and Investigation on Smart Devices: Volume 1
From Everand
Cyber Forensics and Investigation on Smart Devices: Volume 1
Akashdeep Bhardwaj
No ratings yet
Modern Intelligent Instruments - Theory and Application
From Everand
Modern Intelligent Instruments - Theory and Application
Changjian Deng
No ratings yet
EC1016A Microprocessors and Microcontrollers: Academic Course Description
No ratings yet
EC1016A Microprocessors and Microcontrollers: Academic Course Description
7 pages
Introduction To Discrete Control System
No ratings yet
Introduction To Discrete Control System
34 pages
Smarter Meetings Automatically.: Logitech Rally
No ratings yet
Smarter Meetings Automatically.: Logitech Rally
4 pages
Mobile Computing
No ratings yet
Mobile Computing
274 pages
EasyNote SL Disassembly Manual PDF
No ratings yet
EasyNote SL Disassembly Manual PDF
27 pages
Service Manual BE-3D: KV-28WF1K KV-28WF1R KV-28WF1U KV-28WF1A KV-28WF1B KV-28WF1D KV-28WF1E
No ratings yet
Service Manual BE-3D: KV-28WF1K KV-28WF1R KV-28WF1U KV-28WF1A KV-28WF1B KV-28WF1D KV-28WF1E
60 pages
Document No PCPL-0532-4-407-04-11-1 Battery Data Sheet Section - 4 PAGE: 1 of 4
No ratings yet
Document No PCPL-0532-4-407-04-11-1 Battery Data Sheet Section - 4 PAGE: 1 of 4
4 pages
242 EE3165 EE3425 ICDesign Lab0 Eng
No ratings yet
242 EE3165 EE3425 ICDesign Lab0 Eng
96 pages
Sony Hcd-gn1300d Ver1.3 SM
No ratings yet
Sony Hcd-gn1300d Ver1.3 SM
104 pages
Critical Zero Traffic Cells Report - 05012021
No ratings yet
Critical Zero Traffic Cells Report - 05012021
35 pages
Kenarangui Uta 2502M 10815
No ratings yet
Kenarangui Uta 2502M 10815
81 pages
SXT Lte Kit
No ratings yet
SXT Lte Kit
2 pages
Chapter 4 Network Topologies
No ratings yet
Chapter 4 Network Topologies
53 pages
Homework 2 Sol
No ratings yet
Homework 2 Sol
12 pages
Twin Line Amp Config
No ratings yet
Twin Line Amp Config
8 pages
Work
No ratings yet
Work
29 pages
Reg48 User Guide
No ratings yet
Reg48 User Guide
108 pages
LAMAX C3 Manual C38
No ratings yet
LAMAX C3 Manual C38
68 pages
2SK2645
No ratings yet
2SK2645
2 pages
Data Center Disaster Recovery
No ratings yet
Data Center Disaster Recovery
48 pages
System Integrated Data
No ratings yet
System Integrated Data
2 pages
Manual lc100 en v7 9
100% (1)
Manual lc100 en v7 9
144 pages
Be 1 Cds 240
No ratings yet
Be 1 Cds 240
580 pages
LG E2242C-BN Monitor User Manual
No ratings yet
LG E2242C-BN Monitor User Manual
28 pages
PWM Using Arduino
No ratings yet
PWM Using Arduino
6 pages
ECEN 3364 - Industrial Electronics and PLC Application
No ratings yet
ECEN 3364 - Industrial Electronics and PLC Application
6 pages
Firstpower LFP12 200ah
No ratings yet
Firstpower LFP12 200ah
2 pages
Raster Displays CRT & LCD
No ratings yet
Raster Displays CRT & LCD
38 pages